Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 EthernetSwitches
Modified: 2015-06-23
Revision 9
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Juniper Networks, Inc.1133 InnovationWaySunnyvale, California 94089USA408-745-2000www.juniper.net
Juniper Networks, Junos, Steel-Belted Radius, NetScreen, and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the UnitedStates and other countries. The Juniper Networks Logo, the Junos logo, and JunosE are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All othertrademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners.
Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify,transfer, or otherwise revise this publication without notice.
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet SwitchesCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.All rights reserved.
Revision HistoryDecember 2014—Revision 9September 2014—Revision 8July 2014—Revision 7June 2014—Revision 6March 2014—Revision 5December 2013—Revision 4August 2013—Revision 3May 2013—Revision 2April 2013—Revision 1
The information in this document is current as of the date on the title page.
YEAR 2000 NOTICE
Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. Junos OS has no known time-related limitations through theyear 2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchaseorder or, to the extent applicable, to any reseller agreement or end-user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks.By using this software, you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions.
Generally speaking, the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software andmay contain prohibitionsagainst certain uses. The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated. You should consultthe license for further details.
For complete product documentation, please see the Juniper NetworksWeb site at www.juniper.net/techpubs.
ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT
The Juniper Networks product that is the subject of this technical documentation consists of (or is intended for use with) Juniper Networkssoftware. Use of such software is subject to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement (“EULA”) posted athttp://www.juniper.net/support/eula.html. By downloading, installing or using such software, you agree to the terms and conditions ofthat EULA.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.ii
Table of Contents
About the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Junos OS Documentation and Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Requesting Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Self-Help Online Tools and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Opening a Case with JTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications
Chapter 1 EX9208 Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chassis Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Host Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
EX9208 Switch Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Understanding EX9208 Switch Component and Functionality Redundancy . . . . 13
EX9208 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Chapter 2 Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Host Subsystem LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fan LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power Supply (PEM) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Switch Fabric LEDs and Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Line Card LEDs and Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cable Management Brackets in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Midplane in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Host Subsystem in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Routing Engine Module LEDs in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Switch Fabric Module LEDs in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
iiiCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Line Card Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
EX9200-4QS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Line Card Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
EX9200-6QS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Line Card Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
EX9200-32XS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Line Card Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
EX9200-40T Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Line Card Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
EX9200-40F Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Line Card Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
EX9200-40F-M Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Line Card Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Line Card Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
AC Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
AC Power Supply Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
DC Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DC Power Supply Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fan Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Airflow Direction in the EX9208 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 3 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Console Port and AUX Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information for an EX Series
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Ethernet Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . 60
Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications for EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Grounding Points Specifications for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Grounding Cable Lug Specifications for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Grounding Cable Specifications for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.iv
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation
Chapter 4 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Site Preparation Checklist for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
General Site Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches . . . . . . 96
Chapter 5 Rack and Cabinet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Rack Requirements for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Cabinet Requirements for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Clearance Requirements for Airflow andHardwareMaintenance for an EX9208
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 6 Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cables Connecting the EX9200 Switch to Management Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Understanding EX Series Switches Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation,
and Dispersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . 108
Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
AC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
DC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components
Chapter 8 Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Installing and Connecting an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Unpacking the EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Installing a Mounting Shelf in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . 125
Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . 128
Mounting an EX9200 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Using a Mechanical Lift . . . . 129
Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using a Mechanical
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Chapter 9 Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Installing and Removing EX9208 Switch Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Installing Cable Management Brackets on an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Installing an RE Module in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
vCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table of Contents
Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Upgrading an EX9200-SF to an EX9200-SF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Preparing the EX9200 Switch for an EX9200-SF2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Powering Off the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Removing a Routing Engine from an EX9200-SF Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Replacing the EX9200-SF with the EX9200-SF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Installing a Routing Engine into an EX9200-SF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Powering On the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Completing the EX9200-SF2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Unpacking a Line Card Used in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Chapter 10 Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management . . . 165
Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Connecting the EX9200 Switch to an External Alarm-Reporting Device . . . . . . . 167
Connecting the Alarm RelayWires to the Craft Interface in an EX9200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Powering On a DC-Powered EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Chapter 11 Performing Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
EX9200 Switch Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure) . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Part 4 Removing the Switch and Switch Components
Chapter 12 Removing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Powering Off an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Removing an EX9200 Switch from a Rack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift . . 190
RemovinganEX9208Switch fromaRackorCabinetWithoutUsingaMechanical
Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Taking the Host Subsystem Offline in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Removing an RE Module from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.vi
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Disconnecting the Alarm RelayWires from the Craft Interface in an EX9200
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Removing Cable Management Brackets from an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Part 5 Switch and Component Maintenance
Chapter 14 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Routine Maintenance Procedures for EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Maintaining Host Subsystem in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Maintaining the Air Filter in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Maintaining the Fan Tray in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Holding a Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Storing a Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Maintaining Line Card Cables in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Maintaining Power Supplies in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Part 6 Troubleshooting Switch Components
Chapter 15 Troubleshooting Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Troubleshooting the Cooling System in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Troubleshooting Power Supplies in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Troubleshooting Line Cards in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Part 7 Returning Hardware
Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Returning an EX9200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement . . . . . . 235
Locating the Serial Number on an EX9208 Switch or Component . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Locating the Serial Number ID Label on an EX9200 Switch Chassis . . . . . . 238
Locating Serial Number ID Labels on FRU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX
Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Packing an EX9200 Switch or Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Packing an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Packing EX9200 Switch Components for Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Part 8 Safety Information
Chapter 17 General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Definitions of Safety Warning Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fire Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Qualified Personnel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
viiCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table of Contents
Restricted Access Area Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Chapter 18 Radiation and Laser Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings for Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
General Laser Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Class 1 Laser Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Class 1 LED Product Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Laser BeamWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Chapter 19 Installation and Maintenance Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Installation Instructions Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Ramp Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-Mounting Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Grounded Equipment Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Battery Handling Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Jewelry Removal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Lightning Activity Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Operating Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Product Disposal Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
AC Power Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
DC Power Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
TN Power Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Action to Take After an Electrical Accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Part 9 Compliance Information
Chapter 21 Compliance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Battery Compliance Statement for Environmental Requirements for EX Series
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches . . . . . . 300
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
European Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Korea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.viii
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
FCC Part 15 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Nonregulatory Environmental Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches . . . . . . . . . . 304
ixCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table of Contents
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.x
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
List of Figures
Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications
Chapter 1 EX9208 Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Figure 1: Front View of an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Figure 2: Rear View of an AC-Powered EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 3: Rear View of a DC-Powered EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Figure 4: EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 5: EX9208 Switch with AC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 6: EX9208 Switch with DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Chapter 2 Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Figure 7: Craft Interface in an EX9204 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 8: Craft Interface in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 9: Craft Interface in an EX9214 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 10: Alarm Relay Contacts in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 11: Cable Management Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 12: Cable Management Brackets Installed on the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 13: Midplane in an EX9204 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 14: Midplane in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 15: Midplane in an EX9214 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 16: RE Module in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 17: SF Module EX9200-SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 18: SF Module EX9200-SF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 19: EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 20: EX9200-4QS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 21: EX9200-6QS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 22: EX9200-32XS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 23: EX9200-40T Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 24: EX9200-40F Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 25: EX9200-40F-M Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 26: AC Power Supply for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 27: DC Power Supply for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 28: Fan Tray for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 29: Air Filter for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 30: Airflow Through the EX9208 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 3 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 31: Grounding Lug for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation
Chapter 5 Rack and Cabinet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
xiCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Figure 32: Airflow Through the EX9208 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 33: Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for
an EX9208 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 34: AC Plug Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components
Chapter 8 Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Figure 35: Contents of the Shipping Crate for EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 36: Installing the Mounting Shelf for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet . . . . . . 127
Figure 37: Installing the Mounting Shelf for an Open-Frame Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 38: Installing the Switch in an Open-Frame Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 39: Installing the Switch in an Open-Frame Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Chapter 9 Installing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 40: Installing the Cable Management Brackets in an EX9208 Switch . . . 137
Figure 41: Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 42: Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 43: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 44: Installing the Upper Fan Tray in an EX9214 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 45: Installing an RE Module in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 46: Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 47: Unpacking a Line Card Used in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 48: Installing a Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Figure 49: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 50: Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical Transceiver Installed
in a Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 10 Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 51: Connecting the Grounding Lug to a Switch Mounted on Four Posts of
a Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 52: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 53: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 54: Ethernet Management Port on the RE Module in EX9200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 55: Ethernet Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 56: Console and Auxiliary Ports on the RE Module in EX9200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 57: Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 58: Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 59: Connecting the Power Supply Cord to an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 60: DIP Input Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Figure 61: Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Part 4 Removing the Switch and Switch Components
Chapter 13 Removing Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 62: Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 63: Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.xii
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 64: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 65: Removing the Upper Fan Tray in an EX9214 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 66: Removing an RE Module from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 67: Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 68: Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 69: Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 70: Alarm Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Part 5 Switch and Component Maintenance
Chapter 14 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 71: Edges of the Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 72: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 73: Do Not Rest the Edge of a Line Card on a Hard Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Part 7 Returning Hardware
Chapter 16 Returning the Switch or Switch Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 74: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on EX9208 Switch Chassis . . 239
Figure 75: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on an AC Power Supply . . . . 240
Figure 76: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on a DC Power Supply . . . . . 240
Figure 77: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the SF Module . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 78: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the RE Module . . . . . . . . . 241
Part 8 Safety Information
Chapter 20 Power and Electrical Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 79: Placing a Component into an Antistatic Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
xiiiCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
List of Figures
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.xiv
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
List of Tables
About the Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Table 1: Notice Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Part 1 Switch and Components Overview and Specifications
Chapter 1 EX9208 Switch Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table 3: Line Cards Available for EX9208 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table 4: Power Supplies Supported on EX9208 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table 5: Physical Specifications of the EX9208 Switch Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table 6: EX9208 Switch Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 7: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX9208
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Chapter 2 Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Table 8: Host Subsystem LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 9: Fan LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 10: Power Supply LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 11: Switch Fabric Module LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Table 12: Line Card LEDs on the Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Table 13: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 14: FRUs in an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 15: RE Module LEDs of an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 16: SF Module LEDs of an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 17: Line Card Models by Junos OS Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 18: EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 19: EX9200-4QS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 20: EX9200-6QS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 21: EX9200-32XS Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 22: EX9200-40T Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 23: EX9200-40F Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 24: EX9200-40F-M Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 25: LED on Line Cards for EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 26: Network Port LEDs on Line Cards in an EX9200 Switch—Link/Activity
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Table 27: Network Port LEDs on Line Cards in an EX9200 Switch—Status
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 28: AC Power Supply LEDs on EX9208 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Table 29: Power Supply Redundancy and Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Table 30: DC Power Supply LEDs in EX9208 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapter 3 Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
xvCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table 31: EX9200 Switches Console Port and AUX Port Connector Pinout
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 32: EX Series Switches RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 33: Ethernet Port Connector Pinout Information for EX9200 Switches . . . 60
Table 34: Optical Interface Support for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet SFP
Transceivers in EX9200 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 35: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in EX9200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 36: Optical Interface Support for QSFP+ Transceivers in EX9200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 37: Optical Interface Support for CFP Transceivers in EX9200
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 38: Grounding Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Part 2 Planning for Switch Installation
Chapter 4 Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 39: Site Preparation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 40: Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 41: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Chapter 5 Rack and Cabinet Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table 42: Rack Requirements and Specifications for an EX9200 Switch . . . . . . 102
Table 43: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for an EX9200 Switch . . . . 103
Chapter 6 Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Table 44: Cable Specifications for Switch-to-Management-Device
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Chapter 7 Planning Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 45: AC Power Supply Specifications for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 46: AC Power System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 47: DC Power Supply Specifications for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 48: DC Power System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 49: EX9200 Switch Component Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Table 50: AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX9208 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Table 51: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Part 3 Installing and Connecting the Switch and Switch Components
Chapter 8 Installing the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 52: Parts List for Different EX9208 Switch Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 53: Accessory Box Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 54: Four-Post Rack or Cabinet Mounting Hole Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Chapter 10 Connecting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 55: Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Table 56: Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.xvi
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
About the Documentation
• Junos OS Documentation and Release Notes on page xvii
• Documentation Conventions on page xvii
• Documentation Feedback on page xix
• Requesting Technical Support on page xix
Junos OS Documentation and Release Notes
For a list of related Junos OS documentation, see
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/software/junos/.
If the information in the latest release notes differs from the information in the
documentation, follow the Junos OS Release Notes.
To obtain the most current version of all Juniper Networks®technical documentation,
see the product documentation page on the Juniper Networks website at
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/.
Documentation Conventions
Table 1 on page xviii defines the notice icons used in this guide.
xviiCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table 1: Notice Icons
DescriptionMeaningIcon
Indicates important features or instructions.Informational note
Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage.Caution
Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.Warning
Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.Laser warning
Indicates helpful information.Tip
Alerts you to a recommended use or implementation.Best practice
Table 2 on page xviii defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide.
Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions
ExamplesDescriptionConvention
To enter configuration mode, type theconfigure command:
user@host> configure
Represents text that you type.Bold text like this
user@host> show chassis alarms
No alarms currently active
Represents output that appears on theterminal screen.
Fixed-width text like this
• A policy term is a named structurethat defines match conditions andactions.
• Junos OS CLI User Guide
• RFC 1997,BGPCommunities Attribute
• Introduces or emphasizes importantnew terms.
• Identifies guide names.
• Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles.
Italic text like this
Configure themachine’s domain name:
[edit]root@# set system domain-namedomain-name
Represents variables (options for whichyou substitute a value) in commands orconfiguration statements.
Italic text like this
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.xviii
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions (continued)
ExamplesDescriptionConvention
• To configure a stub area, include thestub statement at the [edit protocolsospf area area-id] hierarchy level.
• Theconsoleport is labeledCONSOLE.
Represents names of configurationstatements, commands, files, anddirectories; configurationhierarchy levels;or labels on routing platformcomponents.
Text like this
stub <default-metricmetric>;Encloses optional keywords or variables.< > (angle brackets)
broadcast | multicast
(string1 | string2 | string3)
Indicates a choice between themutuallyexclusive keywords or variables on eitherside of the symbol. The set of choices isoften enclosed in parentheses for clarity.
| (pipe symbol)
rsvp { # Required for dynamicMPLS onlyIndicates a comment specified on thesame lineas theconfiguration statementto which it applies.
# (pound sign)
community namemembers [community-ids ]
Encloses a variable for which you cansubstitute one or more values.
[ ] (square brackets)
[edit]routing-options {static {route default {nexthop address;retain;
}}
}
Identifies a level in the configurationhierarchy.
Indention and braces ( { } )
Identifies a leaf statement at aconfiguration hierarchy level.
; (semicolon)
GUI Conventions
• In the Logical Interfaces box, selectAll Interfaces.
• To cancel the configuration, clickCancel.
Representsgraphicaluser interface(GUI)items you click or select.
Bold text like this
In the configuration editor hierarchy,select Protocols>Ospf.
Separates levels in a hierarchy of menuselections.
> (bold right angle bracket)
Documentation Feedback
We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can
improve the documentation. You can provide feedback by using either of the following
methods:
Requesting Technical Support
Technical product support is available through the JuniperNetworksTechnicalAssistance
Center (JTAC). If you are a customer with an active J-Care or Partner Support Service
xixCopyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
About the Documentation
support contract, or are covered under warranty, and need post-sales technical support,
you can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC.
• JTAC policies—For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies,
review the JTAC User Guide located at
http://www.juniper.net/us/en/local/pdf/resource-guides/7100059-en.pdf.
• Product warranties—For product warranty information, visit
http://www.juniper.net/support/warranty/.
• JTAC hours of operation—The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week, 365 days a year.
Self-Help Online Tools and Resources
For quick and easy problem resolution, Juniper Networks has designed an online
self-service portal called the Customer Support Center (CSC) that provides youwith the
following features:
• Find CSC offerings: http://www.juniper.net/customers/support/
• Search for known bugs: http://www2.juniper.net/kb/
• Find product documentation: http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/
• Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base: http://kb.juniper.net/
• Download the latest versions of software and review release notes:
http://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/software/
• Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications:
http://kb.juniper.net/InfoCenter/
• Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum:
http://www.juniper.net/company/communities/
• Open a case online in the CSC Case Management tool: http://www.juniper.net/cm/
Toverify serviceentitlementbyproduct serial number, useourSerialNumberEntitlement
(SNE) Tool: https://tools.juniper.net/SerialNumberEntitlementSearch/
Opening a Casewith JTAC
You can open a case with JTAC on theWeb or by telephone.
• Use the Case Management tool in the CSC at http://www.juniper.net/cm/.
• Call 1-888-314-JTAC (1-888-314-5822 toll-free in the USA, Canada, and Mexico).
For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll-free numbers, see
http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.xx
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 1
Switch and Components Overview andSpecifications
• EX9208 Switch Overview on page 3
• Component Descriptions on page 17
• Component Specifications on page 57
1Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.2
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 1
EX9208 Switch Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX9208 Switch on page 7
• EX9208 Switch Configurations on page 10
• Understanding EX9208Switch Component and Functionality Redundancy on page 13
• EX9208 Switch Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping on page 14
EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview
Juniper Networks EX9208 Ethernet Switches provide high performance, scalable
connectivity, and carrier-class reliability for high-density environments such as
campus-aggregation and data-center networks. The EX9208 switch has a throughput
of up to 4.8 terabits per second (Tbps) or up to 240 gigabits per second (Gbps) per slot
full duplex. The EX9208 switch is a modular system that provides high availability and
redundancy for all major hardware components, including Routing Engine modules (RE
modules), Switch Fabric modules (SFmodules), fan tray (redundant fans), and power
supplies.
A fullypopulatedEX9208switchprovidesamaximumportdensityof240GigabitEthernet
ports, 160 10-Gigabit Ethernet ports, or 36 40-Gigabit Ethernet ports in a redundant
configuration.
YoucanmanageEX9208switchesbyusing thesame interfaces that youuse formanaging
other devices running the Juniper Networks Junos operating system (Junos OS)—the
command-line interface (CLI), the Network and Security Manager (NSM), and Junos
Space.
• Software on page 4
• Chassis Physical Specifications on page 4
• Host Subsystem on page 5
• Line Cards on page 6
• Cooling System on page 6
• Power Supplies on page 6
3Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Software
Juniper Networks EX Series Ethernet Switches run Junos OS, which provides Layer 2 and
Layer 3 switching, routing, and security services. The same JunosOS code base that runs
on EXSeries switches also runs on all Juniper NetworksMSeries, MXSeries, and TSeries
routers and SRX Series Services Gateways.
Chassis Physical Specifications
The EX9208 switch is eight rack units (8 U) in size. Five EX9208 switches can fit in a
standard 48U rack. Each EX9208 switch is designed to optimize rack space and cabling.
See Figure 1 on page 4, Figure 2 on page 5, and Figure 3 on page 5.
Figure 1: Front View of an EX9208 Switch
ESD
g022
000
Front-mounting flange
SF1
Linecards
SF0
RE1 RE0
ESD point
Craft interface panel
Air intake
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.4
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 2: Rear View of an AC-Powered EX9208 Switch
Figure 3: Rear View of a DC-Powered EX9208 Switch
Host Subsystem
Switching and routing functionality, systemmanagement, and system control functions
of anEX9208switch are performedby thehost subsystem. Thehost subsystemconsists
of a Routing Engine functioning together with a Switch Fabric.
You can install either one or two host subsystems in the slots labeled 0 and 1 in the front
panel of the chassis. A base configuration EX9208 switch has one host subsystem. A
5Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 1: EX9208 Switch Overview
redundant configuration EX9208 switch has a second host subsystem. See “EX9208
Switch Configurations” on page 10.
Line Cards
The EX9208 switch has six horizontal line card slots and supports line rate for each line
card.The linecards inEX9208switchescombineaPacketForwardingEngineandEthernet
interfaces in a single assembly. Line cards are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can
be installed in the line card slots labeled 0 through 5 on the front of the switch chassis.
All line cards are hot-removable and hot-insertable. Table 3 on page 6 lists the line
cards available for EX9208 switches:
Table 3: Line Cards Available for EX9208 Switches
Additional InformationDescriptionModel
“EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card” on page 372-port 100-Gigabit Ethernet, 8-port10-Gigabit Ethernet line card
EX9200-2C-8XS
“EX9200-4QS Line Card” on page 384-port 40-Gigabit Ethernet QSFP+ linecard
EX9200-4QS
“EX9200-6QS Line Card” on page 396-port 40-Gigabit Ethernet QSFP+,24-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ linecard
EX9200-6QS
“EX9200-32XS Line Card” on page 4132-port SFP+ line cardEX9200-32XS
“EX9200-40T Line Card” on page 4240-port 10/100/1000BASE-TRJ-45 linecard
EX9200-40T
“EX9200-40F Line Card” on page 4340-port 100FX/1000BASE-X SFP linecard
EX9200-40F
“EX9200-40F-M Line Card” on page 4440-port 100FX/1000BASE-X SFP linecardwithMediaAccessControlSecurity(MACsec) capability.
EX9200-40F-M
Cooling System
The cooling system in an EX9208 switch is a field-replaceable unit (FRU). It consists of
a hot-removable and hot-insertable fan tray. The fan tray contains six fans. The fan tray
installs vertically on the rightbackof thechassis andprovides side-to-sidechassis cooling.
See “Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch” on page 53.
Power Supplies
Power supplies for the EX9208 switch are fully redundant, load-sharing, and
hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs. Each EX9208 switch chassis can hold up to
four AC or DC power supplies.
Table4onpage 7 shows thedetails of thepower supplies available for EX9208switches.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.6
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 4: Power Supplies Supported on EX9208 Switches
Output PowerInput VoltagePower Supply
1167WLow-voltage line (100–120 VAC)2520WAC
2050WHigh-voltage line (200–240 VAC)
2400W to 2600W–40 VDC through –70 VDC2400WDC
A base AC configuration EX9208 switch ships with three low-line (100–120 VAC) or two
high-line (200–240 VAC) AC power supplies. A redundant AC configuration EX9208
switch ships with four low-line (100–120 VAC) or four high-line (200–240 VAC) AC
power supplies. See “AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch” on page 47.
A redundant DC configuration EX9208 switch ships with four DC power supplies. See
“DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch” on page 50.
CAUTION: Do notmix AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis.
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 182•
• Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27
• Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35
Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX9208 Switch
The EX9208 switch chassis is a rigid sheet-metal structure that houses the other switch
components. Table 5 on page 7 summarizes the physical specifications of the EX9208
switch chassis. See Figure 4 on page 9, Figure 5 on page 9, and Figure 6 on page 10.
Table 5: Physical Specifications of the EX9208 Switch Chassis
DepthWidthHeightWeightDescription
24.5 in. (62.2 cm) (fromfront to chassis rear)Total depth (includingcable managementbrackets) 27.75 in.(70.5 cm)
17.5 in. (44.5 cm)14.0 in. (35.6 cm)Chassis with midplane,craft interface(front-panel display), fantray, air filter, and cablemanagement brackets:65.5 lb (29.7 kg)
Maximum configuration:163.6 lb (74.2 kg)
Chassis
7.75 in. (19.7 cm)11 in. (27.9 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)2.4 lb (1.9 kg)RoutingEnginemodule (REmodule)
7Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 1: EX9208 Switch Overview
Table 5: Physical Specifications of the EX9208 Switch Chassis (continued)
DepthWidthHeightWeightDescription
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)9.6 lb (4.4 kg) (withRouting Engine installed)
Switch Fabricmodule (SFmodule)
23.3 in. (59.2 cm)1.76 in. (4.5 cm)11.58 in. (29.4 cm)6.8 lb (3.84 kg)Fan tray
22.23 in. (56.5 cm)0.31 in. (0.8 cm)10.1 in. (25.7 cm)1.0 lb (0.5 kg)Air filter
4.5 in. (11.4 cm)0.25 in. (0.6 cm)9.9 in. (25.1 cm)0.3 lb (0.8 kg)CableManagementBrackets
4 in. (10.2 cm)14.5 in. (36.8 cm)1.75 in. (4.4 cm)6.6 lb (2.99 kg)AC powersupply
4 in. (10.2 cm)14.5 in. (36.8 cm)1.75 in. (4.4 cm)6.2 lb (2.81 kg)DC powersupply
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)19.4 lb (8.8 kg)EX9200-2C-8XSline card
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)16.8 lb (7.6 kg)EX9200-4QSline card
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)21 lb (9.25 kg)EX9200-6QSline card
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)19.2 lb (8.7 kg)EX9200-32XSline card
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)14.0 lb (6.6 kg)EX9200-40Tline card
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)14.8 lb (6.7 kg)EX9200-40Fline card
22 in. (55.9 cm)17 in. (43.2 cm)1.25 in. (3.2 cm)14.8 lb (6.7 kg)EX9200-40F-Mline card
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.8
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 4: EX9208 Switch
ESD
g022
000
Front-mounting flange
SF1
Linecards
SF0
RE1 RE0
ESD point
Craft interface panel
Air intake
Figure 5: EX9208 Switch with AC Power Supplies
9Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 1: EX9208 Switch Overview
Figure 6: EX9208 Switch with DC Power Supplies
You canmount an EX9208 switch on a standard 19-in. four-post rack or a standard
800mmenclosed cabinet. You canmount up to six EX9208 switches in a standard (48
rack unit (U)) rack.
RelatedDocumentation
Rack Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 101•
• Cabinet Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 103
• Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129
• Installing and Removing EX9208 Switch Hardware Components on page 135
EX9208 Switch Configurations
Table 6 on page 11 lists the hardware configurations for an EX9208 switch—base (AC)
and redundant (ACandDCversions)—andthecomponents included ineachconfiguration.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.10
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 6: EX9208 Switch Hardware Configurations
Configuration ComponentsSwitch Configuration
• Chassis with front-panel display (craft interface) andmidplane
• One Switch Fabric module (SFmodule)
• One Routing Engine module (REmodule)
• One fan tray
• One air filter kit
• One of the following:
• Three low-line(100–120VAC)2520WACpowersupplies
• Twohigh-line (200–240VAC)2520WACpower supplies
• One SFmodule cover panel
• Six line card cover panels
• Blank panels for empty power supply slots
EX9208-BASE-AC(base configuration with 2520WAC power supplies)
• Chassis with front-panel display (craft interface) andmidplane
• One Switch Fabric 2 module (SF2module)
• One Routing Engine module (REmodule)
• One fan tray
• One air filter kit
• Three 2520WAC power supplies
• One SFmodule cover panel
• Six line card cover panels
• Blank panels for empty power supply slots
EX9208-BASE3A-AC(base configuration with 2520WAC power supplies)
• Chassis with craft interface andmidplane
• Two SFmodules
• Two REmodules
• One fan tray
• One air filter kit
• Four 2520WAC power supplies
• Six line card cover panels
EX9208-REDUND-AC(redundant configuration with 2520WAC power supplies)
• Chassis with craft interface andmidplane
• Two SF2modules
• Two REmodules
• One fan tray
• One air filter kit
• Four 2520WAC power supplies
• Six line card cover panels
EX9208-REDUND3A-AC(redundant configuration with 2520WAC power supplies)
11Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 1: EX9208 Switch Overview
Table 6: EX9208 Switch Hardware Configurations (continued)
Configuration ComponentsSwitch Configuration
• Chassis with craft interface andmidplane
• Two SFmodules
• Two REmodules
• One fan tray
• One air filter kit
• Four 2400WDC power supplies
• Six line card cover panels
EX9208-REDUND-DC(redundant configuration with 2400WDC power supplies)
• Chassis with craft interface andmidplane
• Two SF2modules
• Two REmodules
• One fan tray
• One air filter kit
• Four 2400WDC power supplies
• Six line card cover panels
EX9208-REDUND3A-DC(redundant configuration with 2400WDC power supplies)
NOTE: You can install up to six line cards (in any combination) in the switch.
NOTE: Line cards are not part of the base or redundant configuration. Youmust order them separately.
NOTE: Power cords and additional power supplies (AC or DC)must bepurchased separately.
RelatedDocumentation
Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX9208 Switch on page 7•
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
• Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32
• AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47
• DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch on page 53
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.12
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Understanding EX9208 Switch Component and Functionality Redundancy
The JuniperNetworksEX9208EthernetSwitchesareavailableas fully redundant system.
A redundant EX9208 switch configuration is designed so that no single point of failure
can cause the entire switch to fail. See “EX9208 Switch Configurations” on page 10.
The following hardware components provide redundancy to an EX9208 switch:
• HostSubsystem—ThehostsubsystemconsistsofaRoutingEngine functioning together
withaSwitchFabric. Thehost subsystemperformsswitchingand routing functionality,
systemmanagement, and systemcontrol functions of the switch. The switch can have
one or two host subsystems. If two host subsystems are installed, one functions as
the master and the other functions as the backup. If the master host subsystem (or
either of its components) fails, the backup can take over as the master. To operate,
each host subsystem requires a Routing Enginemodule (REmodule) installed directly
into in a Switch Fabric module (SFmodule).
If theRoutingEnginesareconfigured for graceful switchover, thebackupRoutingEngine
automatically synchronizes its configuration and statewith themaster Routing Engine.
Any update to the master Routing Engine state is replicated on the backup Routing
Engine. If thebackupRoutingEngineassumesmastership, packet forwardingcontinues
through the switch without interruption. See “Host Subsystem in an EX9200 Switch”
on page 26.
• Power supplies—In the low-line (100 V) AC power configuration, the switch contains
three or four AC power supplies, located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots
PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all
components in the switch. When three power supplies are present, they share power
almost equally within a fully populated system. Four AC power supplies provide full
power redundancy. If onepower supply failsor is removed, the remainingpower supplies
instantly assume the entire electrical load without interruption. Three power supplies
provide the maximum configuration with full power for as long as the switch is
operational.
In the high-line (200 V) AC power configuration, the switch contains two or four AC
power supplies located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through
PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all components in the
switch.Whentwoormorepowersuppliesarepresent, theysharepoweralmostequally
within a fully populated system. FourACpower suppliesprovide full power redundancy.
If one power supply fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies instantly assume
theentireelectrical loadwithout interruption.Twopowersuppliesprovide themaximum
configuration with full power for as long as the switch is operational.
In the DC configuration, two power supplies are required to supply power to a fully
configured switch. One power supply supports approximately half of the components
in the switch, and the other power supply supports the remaining components. The
addition of two power supplies provides full power redundancy. If one power supply
fails or is removed, the remaining power supplies instantly assume the entire electrical
load without interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum configuration
with full power for as long as the switch is operational.
13Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 1: EX9208 Switch Overview
See “AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch” on page 47 and “DC Power Supply in an
EX9208 Switch” on page 50.
• Cooling system—The cooling system in EX9208 switches consists of fan tray and air
filter. The fan tray contains six fans. Under normal operating conditions, the fans in the
fan tray run at less than full speed. If one of the fans fails, the host subsystem increases
the speed of the remaining fans to provide sufficient cooling for the switch indefinitely.
See “Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch” on page 53.
RelatedDocumentation
Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29•
• Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32
EX9208 Switch Hardware and CLI TerminologyMapping
This topic describes the hardware terms used in EX9208 switch documentation and the
corresponding terms used in the Junos OS command-line interface (CLI). See
Table 7 on page 14.
Table 7: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX9208 Switches
AdditionalInformation
Item InDocumentationValue (CLI)Description (CLI)
HardwareItem (CLI)
“Chassis PhysicalSpecifications of anEX9208 Switch” onpage 7
Switch chassis–EX9208Chassis
“Midplane in anEX9200 Switch” onpage 24
Switch Midplane–EX9208-BPMidplane
“Craft Interface in anEX9200 Switch” onpage 17
Craft Interface–Front Panel DisplayFPM Board
• AC Power Supply inan EX9208 Switchon page 47
• DC Power Supply inan EX9208 Switchon page 50
AC or DC power supplyn is a value in the range of0–3. The value correspondsto the power supply slotnumber.
One of the following:
• PS 1.4-2.52 kW;90-264 V AC in
• DC 2.4 kW PowerEntry Module
PEM(n)
“RoutingEngineModulein an EX9200 Switch”on page 29
REModulen is a value in the range 0through 1.
In base configuration, onlyone entry appears.
In redundant configuration,two entries appear; one foreach Routing Engine module(REmodule) installed in thechassis.
RE-S-EX9200-1800X4RoutingEngine (n)
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.14
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 7: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX9208 Switches (continued)
AdditionalInformation
Item InDocumentationValue (CLI)Description (CLI)
HardwareItem (CLI)
“Switch Fabric Modulein an EX9200 Switch”on page 32
SF Modulen is a value in the range of0–1.
Multiple line items appear inthe CLI if more than oneSwitch Fabric modules (SFmodules) are installed in thechassis.
CB0 and CB1 stand for SFmodules.
EX9200-SCBECB (n)
• EX9200-2C-8XSLine Card on page 37
• EX9200-4QS LineCard on page 38
• EX9200-6QS LineCard on page 39
• EX9200-32XS LineCard on page 41
• EX9200-40T LineCard on page 42
• EX9200-40F LineCard on page 43
• EX9200-40F-MLineCard on page 44
Line card (The switchdoes not have actualFPCs—the line cardsare theFPCequivalentson the switch.)
n is a value in the range of0–5. The value correspondsto the line card slot numberin which the line card isinstalled.
Abbreviatednameof theFlexible PICConcentrator (FPC)
One of the following:
• EX9200 2x100G CXP
• EX92004x40GQSFP
• EX9200 6x40GQSFP+,24x10GSFP+
• EX9200 32x10G SFP
• EX9200 40x1GCopper
• EX9200 40x1G SFP
• EX9200 40x1G SFPMediaAccessControlSecurity (MACsec)capable
FPC (n)
• EX9200-2C-8XSLine Card on page 37
• EX9200-4QS LineCard on page 38
• EX9200-6QS LineCard on page 39
• EX9200-32XS LineCard on page 41
• EX9200-40T LineCard on page 42
• EX9200-40F LineCard on page 43
• EX9200-40F-MLineCard on page 44
Line card (The switchdoes not have actualMICs)
n is a value in the range of0–1.
Abbreviatednameof theModular Interface Card(MIC)
MIC (n)
15Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 1: EX9208 Switch Overview
Table 7: CLI Equivalents of Terms Used in Documentation for EX9208 Switches (continued)
AdditionalInformation
Item InDocumentationValue (CLI)Description (CLI)
HardwareItem (CLI)
• EX9200-2C-8XSLine Card on page 37
• EX9200-4QS LineCard on page 38
• EX9200-6QS LineCard on page 39
• EX9200-32XS LineCard on page 41
• EX9200-40T LineCard on page 42
• EX9200-40F LineCard on page 43
• EX9200-40F-MLineCard on page 44
Line card (The switchdoes not have actualPICs)
n is a value in the range of0–3.
Abbreviatednameof thePhysical Interface Card(PIC)
PIC (n)
“PluggableTransceiversSupportedon EX9200 Switches”on page 60
Optical transceiversn is a value equivalent to thenumber of the port in whichthe transceiver is installed.
Abbreviatednameof thetransceiver
Xcvr (n)
“Cooling System andAirflow in an EX9208Switch” on page 53
Fan tray–Enhanced Left Fan TrayFan tray
RelatedDocumentation
• EX Series Switches Hardware and CLI Terminology Mapping
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.16
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 2
Component Descriptions
• Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch on page 17
• Cable Management Brackets in an EX9208 Switch on page 23
• Midplane in an EX9200 Switch on page 24
• Host Subsystem in an EX9200 Switch on page 26
• Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
• Routing Engine Module LEDs in an EX9200 Switch on page 31
• Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32
• Switch Fabric Module LEDs in an EX9200 Switch on page 35
• Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35
• EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card on page 37
• EX9200-4QS Line Card on page 38
• EX9200-6QS Line Card on page 39
• EX9200-32XS Line Card on page 41
• EX9200-40T Line Card on page 42
• EX9200-40F Line Card on page 43
• EX9200-40F-M Line Card on page 44
• Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch on page 45
• Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch on page 46
• AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47
• AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 49
• DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50
• DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 52
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch on page 53
Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch
The craft interface enables you to view status and troubleshooting information at a
glance and to performmany system control functions. The craft interface is located on
17Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
the front panel of the switch. It contains LEDs and on and off buttons for switch
components, the alarm relay contacts, and an alarm cutoff button.
Figure 7 on page 18 shows the craft interface in an EX9204 switch. Figure 8 on page 18
shows the craft interface in an EX9208 switch.Figure 9 on page 19 shows the craft
interface in an EX9214 switch.
Figure 7: Craft Interface in an EX9204 Switch
g022
028
31 54
8
762
5—1— Major alarm LEDHost subsystem LEDs
6—2— Alarm cutoff/lamp test buttonFan LEDs
7—3— Alarm relay contactsPower supply LEDs
8—4— LEDs and control buttons for Switch Fabricand Line cards
Minor alarm LED
NOTE: You can install a line card or an SFmodule in themultifunctional slotlabeled 1|0 in EX9204switches. The corresponding LEDdisplays information
depending on the hardware installed in that slot.
Figure 8: Craft Interface in an EX9208 Switch
g022
004
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9
6—1— Alarm cutoff/lamp test buttonHost subsystem LEDs
7—2— Alarm relay contactsFan LEDs
8—3— Switch Fabric LEDs and control buttonsPower supply LEDs
9—4— Line card LEDs and control buttonsMinor alarm LED
5—Major alarm LED
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.18
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 9: Craft Interface in an EX9214 Switch
g022
044
31 54 762
8
6—1— Alarm cutoff/lamp test buttonHost subsystem LEDs
7—2— Alarm relay contactsFan LEDs
8—3— Switch Fabric LEDs and control buttonsPower supply LEDs
9—4— Line card LEDs and control buttonsMinor alarm LED
5—Major alarm LED
NOTE: You can install a line card or a Switch Fabric module (SFmodule) inslot nine (labeled 2 | 6). The corresponding LED displays information
depending on the hardware installed in that slot.
NOTE: At leastoneSwitchFabricmodule (SFmodule)withaRoutingEnginemodule (REmodule) must be installed in the switch for the craft interfaceto obtain power.
The craft interface has the following components:
• Host Subsystem LEDs on page 19
• Fan LEDs on page 20
• Power Supply (PEM) LEDs on page 20
• Switch Fabric LEDs and Control Buttons on page 21
• Line Card LEDs and Control Buttons on page 21
• Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Button on page 22
• Alarm Relay Contacts on page 22
Host Subsystem LEDs
Each host subsystem (REmodulewith SFmodule) has three LEDs, located on the upper
left of the craft interface, to indicate its status. The LEDs grouped with labels RE0 and
RE1 show the status of the host subsystems installed in the switch. Table 8 on page 20
describes the functions of these LEDs.
19Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 8: Host Subsystem LEDs on the Craft Interface
DescriptionStatusLabel
Host subsystem is functioning as the master.GreenMASTER
Host subsystem is either functioning as thebackup or not installed.
Unlit
Host subsystem is online and is functioningnormally.
GreenONLINE
Host subsystem is either offline or not installed.Unlit
Host subsystem is installed but Routing Engineis offline.
RedOFFLINE
Host subsystem is not installed.Unlit
Fan LEDs
The fan LEDs are located on the top left of the craft interface. Table 9 on page 20
describes the functions of the fan LEDs.
Table 9: Fan LEDs on the Craft Interface
DescriptionStatusLabel
Fan is functioning normally.GreenOK
Fan is not installed.Unlit
Fan has failed.RedFAIL
Fan is not installed or functioningnormally.
Unlit
Power Supply (PEM) LEDs
Each power supply has two LEDs on the craft interface that indicate its status. The LEDs,
labeled 0 through 3, are located on the craft interface next to the PEM label.
Table 10 on page 20 describes the functions of the power supply LEDs on the craft
interface.
Table 10: Power Supply LEDs on the Craft Interface
DescriptionStatusLabel
Power supply is functioning normally.GreenOK
Power supply in not installed.Off
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.20
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 10: Power Supply LEDs on the Craft Interface (continued)
DescriptionStatusLabel
Power supply has failed.RedFAIL
Power supply is not installed orfunctioning normally.
Off
Switch Fabric LEDs and Control Buttons
Each Switch Fabric module has two LEDs on the craft interface that indicates its status.
The LEDs—OK and FAIL—are associated with control buttons and are located along the
bottom of the craft interface. You can turn the SFmodules on or off by pressing these
buttons on the craft interface.
Table 11 on page 21 describes the status of the SFmodule LEDs.
Table 11: Switch Fabric Module LEDs on the Craft Interface
DescriptionStatusLabel
On steadily—The SFmodule isfunctioning normally.
GreenOK
Blinking—The SFmodule is comingonline or going offline.
The SFmodule is not online.Unlit
The SFmodule has failed.RedFAIL
The SFmodule is not installed or is notfunctioning normally.
Unlit
Line Card LEDs and Control Buttons
Each linecardhas twoLEDs—OKandFAIL—onthecraft interface that indicates its status.
The line card LEDs are associatedwith control buttons and are located along the bottom
of the craft interface. You can turn a line card online or offline by using its control button
on the craft interface. Table 12 on page 21 describes the function of the line card LEDs.
Table 12: Line Card LEDs on the Craft Interface
DescriptionStatusLabel
On steadily—Line card is functioning normally.GreenOK
Blinking—Line card is coming online or going offline.
Line card is not online.Unlit
21Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 12: Line Card LEDs on the Craft Interface (continued)
DescriptionStatusLabel
Line card has failed.RedFAIL
Line card is not installed or functioning normally.Unlit
Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Button
Two large alarm LEDs are located at the upper right of the craft interface. The circular
LED called major alarm LED glows to indicate a critical condition that can result in a
system shutdown. The triangular LED called minor alarm LED glows to indicate a less
severe condition (warning) that requires monitoring or maintenance. Both LEDs can be
lit simultaneously.
A condition that causes an LED to be lit also activates the corresponding alarm relay
contact on the craft interface.
The alarmcutoff/lamp test (ACO/LT) button, located next to the alarmLEDs, is a control
button for alarms. You can press the ACO/LT button to deactivate major andminor
alarms. Deactivating an alarm turns off both LEDs and deactivates the device attached
to the corresponding alarm relay contact on the craft interface.
Table 13 on page 22 describes the alarm LEDs and the alarm cutoff/lamp test button.
Table 13: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button
DescriptionStatusAlarm LEDs andButton
Indicates a critical condition that can cause the switchto stop functioning. Possible causes includecomponent removal, failure, or overheating.
Red
Major alarm LED
Indicates a serious but nonfatal error condition, suchaswarning for amaintenance or a significant increasein component temperature.
Yellow
Minor alarm LED
Deactivatesmajor andminor alarms. Causes all LEDson the craft interface to light (for testing) whenpressed and held.
–
Alarm cutoff/lamp testbutton
Alarm Relay Contacts
The craft interface has two alarm relay contacts for connecting the switch to external
alarm devices. Whenever a system condition triggers either the critical (major alarm) or
warning (minor alarm) alarm on the craft interface, the alarm relay contacts are also
activated. The alarm relay contacts are located on the upper right of the craft interface.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.22
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 10 on page 23 shows the alarm relay contacts in EX9200 switches.
Figure 10: Alarm Relay Contacts in EX9200 Switches
g022
029
Craft Interface panel
Alarmrelay
contacts
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Cable Management Brackets in an EX9208 Switch
The cable management brackets (see Figure 11 on page 23) consist of plastic dividers
located on the left and right sides of each line card slot and Switch Fabric module (SF
module) slot. The cable management brackets allow you to route the cables outside
the switch and away from the line cards and SFmodules.
Figure 11: Cable Management Brackets
23Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 12: Cable Management Brackets Installed on the Switch
g022
005
Cable managers
RelatedDocumentation
Installing Cable Management Brackets on an EX9208 Switch on page 136•
• Removing Cable Management Brackets from an EX9208 Switch on page 209
Midplane in an EX9200 Switch
Themidplane is located on the rear of the chassis and forms the rear of the card cage.
The Switch Fabric modules (SFmodules) and line cards are installed into the midplane
from the front of the chassis, and the power supplies install into the midplane from the
rear of the chassis. The cooling system components also connect to the midplane.
Themidplane performs the following major functions:
• Provides a data path—Data packets are transferred across the midplane between the
line cards through the Switch Fabric on the host subsystem.
• Distributes power—The power supplies connect to the midplane, which distributes
power to all the switch components.
• Provides a signal path—Themidplane provides the signal path to the line cards, Switch
Fabric, and other system components for monitoring and control of the system.
Figure 13 on page 25 shows themidplane in an EX9204 switch. Figure 14 on page 25
shows themidplane in an EX9208 switch. Figure 15 on page 26 shows themidplane in
an EX9214 switch.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.24
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 13: Midplane in an EX9204 Switch
ESD
g022
027
Midplane
Figure 14: Midplane in an EX9208 Switch
g022
001
Midplane
25Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 15: Midplane in an EX9214 Switch
g022
043
Midplane
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Host Subsystem in an EX9200 Switch
Switching and routing functionality, systemmanagement, and system control functions
of an EX9200 switch are performed by host subsystem. A host subsystem consists of a
Routing Engine functioning together with a Switch Fabric.
You can install either one or two host subsystems in the front panel of an EX9204 or an
EX9208 switch. A base configuration EX9204 and EX9208 switch has one host
subsystem. A redundant configuration EX9204 and EX9208 switch has a second host
subsystem.
Youcan install either twoor threehost subsystems in the frontpanelofanEX9214switch.
AbaseconfigurationEX9214 switchhas twohost subsystems.A redundant configuration
EX9214 switch has a third host subsystem.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.26
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: InEX9204andEX9208switches,we recommendthat you install twohost subsystems for redundant protection. If you install only one hostsubsystem, we recommend that you install it in slot 0. In EX9214 switches,
we recommend that you install three host subsystems for redundantprotection. If you install only two host subsystems, we recommend that youinstall it in slot 0 and 1.
Each host subsystem has LEDs in the craft interface that display its status. See “Craft
Interface in an EX9200 Switch” on page 17.
RelatedDocumentation
Taking the Host SubsystemOffline in an EX9200 Switch on page 199•
• Maintaining Host Subsystem in EX9200 Switches on page 213
• Understanding EX9204 Switch Component and Functionality Redundancy
• Understanding EX9208Switch Component and Functionality Redundancy on page 13
• Understanding EX9214 Switch Component and Functionality Redundancy
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
• Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32
Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are switch components that you can replace at your site.
The EX9200 switch uses the following types of FRUs:
• Hot-insertable and hot-removable—You can remove and replace these components
without powering off the switch or disrupting the switching function.
• Hot-pluggable—You can remove and replace these components without powering off
the switch, but the switching function is interrupted until you replace the component.
Table 14 on page 27 lists the FRUs for the EX9200 switch and their types.
Table 14: FRUs in an EX9200 Switch
TypeFRU
Hot-insertable and hot-removable.Power supplies
Hot-insertable and hot-removable.Fan tray and air filter
27Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 14: FRUs in an EX9200 Switch (continued)
TypeFRU
Redundant configuration:
• Master REmodule is hot-pluggable.
• Backup REmodule is hot-insertable andhot-removable.
Base configuration:
• Youmust disable the switch beforeremoving any REmodule. See “Taking theHost SubsystemOffline in an EX9200Switch” on page 199.
See EX9204 Switch Configurations, “EX9208Switch Configurations” on page 10, andEX9214 Switch Configurations.
Routing Engine module (REmodule)
Redundant configuration:
• Master SFmodule is hot-pluggable.
• Backup SFmodule is hot-insertable andhot-removable.
Base configuration:
• Youmust disable the switch beforeremoving any SFmodule. See “Taking theHost SubsystemOffline in an EX9200Switch” on page 199.
See EX9204 Switch Configurations, “EX9208Switch Configurations” on page 10, andEX9214 Switch Configurations.
Switch Fabric module (SFmodule)
Hot-insertable and hot-removable. Werecommend that you take the line cardsoffline before removing them.See “Removinga Line Card from an EX9200 Switch” onpage 204.
Line cards
Hot-insertable and hot-removable.SFP, SFP+, QSFP+, and CFP transceivers
See “Pluggable Transceivers Supported onEX9200 Switches” on page 60 for the Junos OSrelease inwhich the transceiverswere introduced.
NOTE: Line cards are not part of the base or redundant configuration. Youmust order them separately.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.28
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition,change, or upgrade of hardware components athttps://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/updateinstallbase.jsp .
Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts.This note applies if you change the type of power supply from AC to DC orDC to AC or add a new type of line card. It does not apply if you replace thesecomponents with the same type of component.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
• Installing and Removing EX9204 Switch Hardware Components
• Installing and Removing EX9208 Switch Hardware Components on page 135
• Installing and Removing EX9214 Switch Hardware Components
Routing EngineModule in an EX9200 Switch
The Routing Engine is housed in a Routing Engine module (REmodule) (see
Figure 16 on page 30). The Routing Engine runs Junos OS. Software processes that run
on the Routing Engine maintain the routing tables, manage the routing protocols used
on the switch, control the switch interfaces, control some chassis components, and
provide the interface for systemmanagement and user access to the switch.
Routing Engine modules (REmodules) are installed directly into Switch Fabric modules
(SFmodules). EachREmodulehousesoneRoutingEngine.AnEX9204orEX9208switch
can have either one or two Routing Engines. An EX9214 switch can have either two or
three Routing Engines. If two Routing Engines are installed, one functions as the master
and the other acts as the backup. If the master Routing Engine fails or is removed, the
backup takes over as the master.
The backupRouting Engine is hot-insertable and hot-removable, but themaster Routing
Engine is hot-pluggable. If only one REmodule is installed, youmust disable the switch
before removing the REmodule.
A base configuration EX9204 and EX9208 switch has only one REmodule. See EX9204
Switch Configurations and “EX9208 Switch Configurations” on page 10. You can add a
second REmodule to the configuration for a redundant host subsystem.
A base configuration EX9214 switch has two REmodules. See EX9214 Switch
Configurations. You can add a third REmodule to the configuration for a redundant host
subsystem.
Figure 16 on page 30 shows the REmodule in an EX9200 switch.
29Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 16: REModule in an EX9200 Switch
g022
003USB
portResetbutton
OnlineLED
MasterLED
OK/FailLED
StorageLED
Extractorclip
Extractorclip
Consoleport
Auxiliaryport
Ethernetport
SSDslot 2
SSDslot 1
NOTE: We recommend that you install two REmodules for redundancy.
The REmodule performs the following functions:
• Provides full fabric connectivity to all line cards installed in the chassis
• Through the switching plane, provides switching functionality to the switch
• Powers the line cards on and off
• Controls system resets and the boot sequence for the switch
• Monitors and controls the fan speed, power status for various chassis components,
and craft interface LEDs
The REmodule has the following components:
• Auxiliary (AUX) port—Connects the REmodule to amodem or other auxiliary device.
• Console (CONSOLE) port—Connects the REmodule to a system console through a
cable with an RJ-45 connector. See “Connecting an EX9200 Switch to aManagement
Console or an Auxiliary Device” on page 166.
• Ethernet (<...>) port—Connects the REmodule through an Ethernet connection to a
management LAN (or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection) for
out-of-bandmanagement. See “Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Network for
Out-of-Band Management” on page 165.
• USB port—Provides a removable media interface through which you can install the
Junos OSmanually. See “USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch” on page 57.
• Solid-state drive (SSD)—Provides secondary storage for log files,memory dumps, and
rebooting the system if the CompactFlash card fails.
the CompactFlash card provides primary storage for software images, configuration
files, andmicrocode. The CompactFlash card is fixed and is inaccessible from outside
the switch.
• Reset (RESET) button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.
• Status LEDs—Indicates the status of the Routing Engine. Each REmodule has four
LEDs labeledMASTER, STORAGE,ONLINE, andOK/FAIL on the faceplate.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.30
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Online/Offline (ONLINE/OFFLINE) button—Turns the Routing Engine online or offline
when pressed.
• Extractor cilp—Used for installing and removing the REmodule.
• Captive screws—Secure the REmodule in place.
Theswitchshipswith JunosOSpreinstalledon theRoutingEngine.Thereare threecopies
of the software:
• One copy on the CompactFlash card in the Routing Engine.
• One copy on the hard disk in the Routing Engine.
• One copy on a USB flash drive that can be inserted into the slot on the Routing Engine
faceplate.
TheRoutingEngineboots fromthestoragemedia in thisorder: theUSBdevice (if present),
then the CompactFlash card, then the SSD, and then the LAN.
RelatedDocumentation
Installing an RE Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 143•
• Removing an RE Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 200
• Taking the Host SubsystemOffline in an EX9200 Switch on page 199
Routing EngineModule LEDs in an EX9200 Switch
Each Routing Engine module (REmodule) has four LEDs on themodule faceplate.
Table 15 on page 31 describes the functions of these LEDs.
Table 15: REModule LEDs of an EX9200 Switch
State and DescriptionStatusLED Label
Routing Engine is functioning as the master.BlueMASTER
RoutingEngine is either functioningas thebackupor not installed.
Unlit
Blinking—Indicatesactivityon thesolid-statedrive(SSD) or the flash memory device.
GreenSTORAGE
• On steadily—Routing Engine is operatingnormally.
• Blinking—Routing Engine is coming online orgoing offline.
GreenONLINE
Routing Engine has failed.RedOK/FAIL
RelatedDocumentation
Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32•
• Installing an RE Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 143
• Removing an RE Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 200
31Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch
The Switch Fabric serves as the central nonblocking matrix through which all network
data passes.
Switch Fabric modules (SFmodules) are installed horizontally on the front panel of the
switch chassis. You can install either one or two SFmodules in an EX9204 or EX9208
switch and either two or three SFmodules in an EX9214 switch. A base configuration
EX9204 or EX9208 switch has only one SFmodule, and a base configuration EX9214
switch has two SFmodules. See EX9204 Switch Configurations, “EX9208 Switch
Configurations” on page 10, or EX9214 Switch Configurations.
In EX9204 and EX9208 switches, you can add a second SFmodule to the configuration
for host subsystem redundancy. In EX9214 switches, you can add a third SFmodule to
the configuration for host subsystem redundancy. If two SFmodules are installed, one
SFmodule functions as the master and the other functions as the backup. If the master
SFmodule or its components fails or is removed the backupmodule takes the role of
master.
The Routing Engine module (REmodule) installs directly into a slot on the SFmodule.
The Switch Fabric contains logic that determines which Routing Engine is the master.
Themaster Routing Engine controls many internal functions of the SFmodule.
The backup SFmodule is hot-insertable and hot-removable, but the master SFmodule
is hot-pluggable.
The key functions of the Switch Fabric are:
• Monitor and control system functions
• Interconnection of all line cards
• Clocking, system resets, and booting control
• Routing Engine carrier
Figure 17 on page 33 shows the original SFmodule, EX9200-SF.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.32
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 17: SFModule EX9200-SF
g022
002
Starting with Junos OS Release 14.1, a high-speed SFmodule, EX9200-SF2, is available.
Compared to the original SFmodule, EX9200-SF, the EX9200-SF2 offers increased
bandwidth, providing higher-capacity traffic support in settings that require greater
interface density (slot and capacity scale).
The EX9200-SF2 supports all EX9200 line cards.
NOTE: When you upgrade from an EX9200-SFmodule to an EX9200-SF2module in an EX9200 switch, the SFmodule types can co-exist in the switchduring theupgrade.However, youmust replace thatEX9200-SFmodulewithanother EX9200-SF2module for normal switch operation. See “Upgradingan EX9200-SF to an EX9200-SF2” on page 148.
Figure 18 on page 34 shows the high-speed SFmodule, EX9200-SF2.
33Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 18: SFModule EX9200-SF2
EX
9200-SF
2
EX
9200-SF
2
LINK
LINK
BIT
SG
PS
UT
I
EX9200-SF2
The SFmodules install horizontally into the front of the chassis. If any slots are empty,
youmust install a cover panel.
The SFmodule has the following components:
• Chassis management Ethernet switch
• I2C bus logic, used for low-level communication with each component
• Component redundancy circuitry
• Control Board/Routing Engine mastership mechanism
• Gigabit Ethernet switch that is connected to the embedded CPU complex on all
components
• Control field-programmable gate array (FPGA)—Provides the Peripheral Component
Interconnect (PCI) interface to the Routing Engine
• 1000Base-TEthernet controller—Providesa 1-GbpsEthernet link between theRouting
Engines
• Ethernet switch—Provides 1-Gbps link speeds between the Routing Engine and the
line cards
• External clock interface—Allows BITS or GPS clock source input to the centralized
timing circuit, or allows centralized timing to be output to BITS or GPS
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.34
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Circuits for chassis management and control
• Power circuits for the Routing Engine and the Switch Fabric
• SFmoduleLEDs—Indicatesystemstatus.See “SwitchFabricModuleLEDs inanEX9200
Switch” on page 35.
• Ejector levers—Used for installing and removing the SFmodule
• Captive screws—Secure the SFmodule in place
RelatedDocumentation
Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 145•
• Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 202
• Taking the Host SubsystemOffline in an EX9200 Switch on page 199
Switch Fabric Module LEDs in an EX9200 Switch
The Switch Fabric module (SFmodule) has three LEDs on themodule faceplate.
Table 16 on page 35 describes the functions of these LEDs.
Table 16: SFModule LEDs of an EX9200 Switch
DescriptionStatusLED
Switch Fabric is in active mode.GreenFABRIC ACTIVE
Switch Fabric is offline.Unlit
On steadily—Switch Fabric is operating infabric-only mode.
GreenFABRIC ONLY
SwitchFabric is notoperating in fabric-onlymode.Unlit
Switch Fabric is online.GreenOK/FAIL
Switch Fabric has failed.Red
Switch Fabric is offline.Unlit
The BITS,GPS, andUTI LEDs, located next to the EXTCLK port, indicate the status of the
respective clocking interface. These LEDs are not supported.
RelatedDocumentation
Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 145•
• Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 202
• Taking the Host SubsystemOffline in an EX9200 Switch on page 199
Line CardModel and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch
Seven line cards are available for EX9200 switches.
35Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 17 on page 36 shows themodel numbers, names of the line cards, and the Junos
OS release in which the line cards were first supported.
Table 17: Line CardModels by Junos OS Release
First Junos OS ReleaseDescriptionModel number
13.2R12-port 100-Gigabit Ethernet, 8-port10-Gigabit Ethernet line card
See “EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card” onpage 37
EX9200-2C-8XS
12.3R24-port 40-Gigabit Ethernet QSFP+ linecard
See “EX9200-4QSLineCard” onpage 38
EX9200-4QS
14.2R1
CAUTION: Junos OSRelease 14.2R1 supportsthe EX9200-6QS line cardexcept for one specificconfiguration. See theJunosOS 14.2R2ReleaseNotes for Known IssuePR1068396 to determinewhether that configurationapplies to your switch andwhich release to use if theconfiguration does apply.
6-port 40-Gigabit Ethernet QSFP+,24-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ linecard
See “EX9200-6QSLineCard” onpage39
EX9200-6QS
12.3R232-port 10-GigabitEthernetSFP+ linecard
See “EX9200-32XSLineCard”onpage41
EX9200-32XS
12.3R240-port 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ-45 linecard
See “EX9200-40T Line Card” on page 42
EX9200-40T
12.3R240-port 100FX/1000BASE-X SFP linecard
See “EX9200-40F Line Card” on page 43
EX9200-40F
14.2R140-port 100FX/1000BASE-X SFP linecard with Media Access Control Security(MACsec) capability
See “EX9200-40F-M Line Card” onpage 44
EX9200-40F-M
Ensure that all of the line cards in a switch are supported in the Junos OS release that
you want to use.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.36
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card
The line cards in EX9200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces in a single assembly. Line cards are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can
be installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions. See Figure 19 on page 37.
Figure 19: EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card
This topic describes:
• Line Card Models on page 37
• Line Card Components on page 37
Line CardModels
Table 18 on page 37 shows themodel number, description of the line card model, and
the Junos OS release in which the line card was first supported.
Table 18: EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card
Junos OS Release RequiredDescriptionModel
13.2R1 or later2-port 100-Gigabit Ethernet, 8-port10-Gigabit Ethernet line card
EX9200-2C-8XS
You can use the show version fpc command to see the version of Junos OS for EX Series
switches loaded on the line card.
Line Card Components
The EX9200-2C-8XS line card has:
• Two 100-Gigabit Ethernet C-form factor pluggable (CFP) ports, which can house two
100-gigabitCFPtransceivers.Theseportssupport 100GBASE-LR4and100GBASE-SR10
transceivers.
• Eight 10-Gigabit Ethernet small-form factor pluggable (SFP+) ports, which can house
eight 10-gigabit small-form factor pluggable (SFP+) transceivers. Theseports support
10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER, and 10GBASE-ZR transceivers.
37Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
• Eight dust covers for the SFP+ ports and two dust covers for the CFP ports
• Line card LED—LED labeledOK/FAIL indicates the status information of the line card.
See “Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch” on page 45.
• Network port LED—One LED per network port indicates the link activity and status of
each port. See “Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch” on page 46.
The ports are divided into two port groups. The four 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ ports
labeled 0/0 through 0/3 and the 100-Gigabit Ethernet CFP port labeled 1/0 form one
port group. The four 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ ports labeled 2/0 through 2/3 and the
100-Gigabit Ethernet CFP port labeled 3/0 form the other port group. The ports in each
group share 120gigabits of bandwidth. Thus, you can transmit up to 120gigabits of traffic
through a port group, without packet drop.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
EX9200-4QS Line Card
The line cards in EX9200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces on a single assembly. They are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be
installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions. See Figure 20 on page 38.
Figure 20: EX9200-4QS Line Card
This topic describes:
• Line Card Models on page 38
• Line Card Components on page 39
Line CardModels
Table 19 on page 39 shows themodel number, description of the line card model, and
the Junos OS release in which the line card was first supported.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.38
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 19: EX9200-4QS Line Card
Junos OS Release RequiredDescriptionModel
12.3R2 or later4-port 40-Gigabit Ethernet QSFP+line card
EX9200-4QS
You can use the show version fpc command to see the version of Junos OS for EX Series
switches loaded on the line card.
Line Card Components
The EX9200-4QS line card has:
• Four 40-Gigabit Ethernet QSFP+ ports
• Four dust covers preinstalled in the network ports
• Line card status LED—LED labeledOK/FAIL indicates the status of the line card. See
“Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch” on page 45.
• Network port LED—LED labeled Link located next to the network port indicates the
linkactivity statusof theport.See “NetworkPort LEDs inanEX9200Switch”onpage46.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
EX9200-6QS Line Card
The line cards in EX9200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces in a single assembly. Line cards are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can
be installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions. See Figure 21 on page 39.
Figure 21: EX9200-6QS Line Card
This topic describes:
• Line Card Models on page 40
• Line Card Components on page 40
39Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Line CardModels
Table 20 on page 40 shows themodel number, description of the line card model, and
the Junos OS release in which the line card was first supported.
Table 20: EX9200-6QS Line Card
Junos OS Release RequiredDescriptionModel
14.2R1 or later
CAUTION: Junos OS Release 14.2R1 supports theEX9200-6QS line card except for one specificconfiguration. See the Junos OS 14.2R2 ReleaseNotes for Known Issue PR1068396 to determinewhether that configuration applies to your switch andwhich release to use if the configuration does apply.
6-port 40-GigabitEthernet, 24-port10-Gigabit Ethernet linecard
EX9200-6QS
You can use the show version fpc command to see the version of Junos OS for EX Series
switches loaded on the line card.
Line Card Components
The EX9200-6QS line card has:
• Six 40-Gigabit Ethernet quad small form-factor pluggable plus (QSFP+) ports which
can house six 40-gigabitQSFP+ transceivers. These ports support 40GBASE-LR4and
40GBASE-SR4 transceivers.
• Twenty-four 10-Gigabit Ethernet small-form factor pluggable (SFP+)ports,which can
house twenty-four 10-gigabit small-form factor pluggable (SFP+) transceivers. These
portssupport 10GBASE-SR, 10GBASE-LR, 10GBASE-ER,and 10GBASE-ZRtransceivers.
• Line card LED—LED labeledOK/FAIL indicates the status information of the line card.
See “Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch” on page 45.
• Network port LED—One LED per network port indicates the link activity and status of
each port. See “Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch” on page 46.
The ports are divided into two port groups. The six 40-Gigabit Ethernet QSFP+ ports
labeled 2/0 through 2/2 and 3/0 through 3/2 form one port group. The twenty-four
10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ ports labeled 0/0 through 0/11 and 1/0 through 1/11 form the
other port group. The ports in each group share 240 gigabits of bandwidth. Thus, you can
transmit up to 240 gigabits of traffic through a port group, without packet drop.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
• Troubleshooting Traffic Drops on EX9200-6QS Line Cards
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.40
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
EX9200-32XS Line Card
The line cards in EX9200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces on a single assembly. They are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be
installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions. See Figure 22 on page 41.
Figure 22: EX9200-32XS Line Card
g000
856
EX9200-32XS
This topic describes:
• Line Card Models on page 41
• Line Card Components on page 41
Line CardModels
Table 21 on page 41 shows themodel number, description of the line card model, and
the Junos OS release in which the line card was first supported.
Table 21: EX9200-32XS Line Card
Junos OS Release RequiredDescriptionModel
12.3R2 or later32-port 10-Gigabit SFP+ line cardEX9200-32XS
You can use the show version fpc command to see the version of Junos OS for EX Series
switches loaded on the line card.
Line Card Components
The line card has:
• 32 10-Gigabit SFP+ ports, each of which can house SFP+ transceivers
• 32 dust covers (shipped in an accessory bag)
• Line card LED—LED labeledOK/FAIL indicates the status information of the line card.
See “Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch” on page 45.
• Network port LED—One LED per network port indicates the link activity of each port.
See “Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch” on page 46.
The ports are divided into twoport groups of 16 ports each; the 10-Gigabit Ethernet SFP+
ports labeled 0/0 through 0/7 and 1/0 through 1/7 form one port group; the 10-Gigabit
Ethernet SFP+ ports labeled 2/0 through 2/7 and 3/0 through 3/7 form the other port
41Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
group. The ports in each group share 120 gigabits of bandwidth. Thus, you can transmit
up to 120 gigabits of traffic through a port group, without packet drop.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
EX9200-40T Line Card
The line cards in EX9200 switches provide packet forwarding services. They are
field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be installed in the line card slots on the front of
the switch chassis. The line cards are hot-insertable andhot-removable: You can remove
and replace themwithout powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions. See
Figure 23 on page 42.
Figure 23: EX9200-40T Line Card
This topic describes:
• Line Card Models on page 42
• Line Card Components on page 42
Line CardModels
Table 22 on page 42 shows themodel number, description of the line card model, and
the Junos OS release in which the line card was first supported.
Table 22: EX9200-40T Line Card
Junos OS Release RequiredDescriptionModel
12.3R2 or later40-port 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ-45line card
EX9200-40T
You can use the show version fpc command to see the version of Junos OS for EX Series
switches loaded on the line card.
Line Card Components
The EX9200-40T line card has:
• 40 10/100/1000BASE-T RJ-45 ports
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.42
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Line card LED—LED labeledOK/FAIL indicates the status information of the line card.
See “Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch” on page 45.
• Network port LEDs—Two LEDs per network port that indicate the link activity and
status of each port. See “Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch” on page 46.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
EX9200-40F Line Card
The line cards in EX9200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces on a single assembly. They are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can be
installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions. See Figure 24 on page 43.
Figure 24: EX9200-40F Line Card
This topic describes:
• Line Card Models on page 43
• Line Card Components on page 44
Line CardModels
Table 23 on page 43 shows themodel number, description of the line card model, and
the Junos OS release in which the line card was first supported.
Table 23: EX9200-40F Line Card
Junos OS Release RequiredDescriptionModel
12.3R2 or later40-port 100FX/1000BASE-XSFPline card
EX9200-40F
You can use the show version fpc command to see the version of Junos OS for EX Series
switches loaded on the line card.
43Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Line Card Components
The EX9200-40F line card has:
• 40 100FX/1000BASE-X SFP ports
• 40 dust covers (shipped in an accessory bag)
• Line card LED—LED labeledOK/FAIL indicates the status information of the line card.
See “Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch” on page 45.
• Network port LED—One LED per network port indicates the link activity and status of
each port. See “Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch” on page 46.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
EX9200-40F-M Line Card
The line cards in EX9200 switches combine a Packet Forwarding Engine and Ethernet
interfaces in a single assembly. Line cards are field-replaceable units (FRUs) that can
be installed in the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are
hot-insertable and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering
off the switch or disrupting switch functions. See Figure 25 on page 44.
Figure 25: EX9200-40F-M Line Card
This topic describes:
• Line Card Models on page 44
• Line Card Components on page 45
Line CardModels
Table 24 on page 45 shows themodel number, description of the line card model, and
the Junos OS release in which the line card was first supported.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.44
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 24: EX9200-40F-M Line Card
Junos OS ReleaseRequiredDescriptionModel
14.2R1 or later40-port Gigabit Ethernet line card. All the 40ports on the line card areMedia Access ControlSecurity (MACsec) capable.
EX9200-40F-M
You can use the show version fpc command to see the version of Junos OS for EX Series
switches loaded on the line card.
Line Card Components
The EX9200-40F-M line card has:
• 40 Gigabit Ethernet small form-factor pluggable (SFP) MACsec-capable ports that
can house SFP transceivers. These ports support 1000BASE-T, 10/100/1000BASE-T,
100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-EX, 1000BASE-LH, 1000BASE-LX, and 1000BASE-SX
transceivers.
• Line card LED—LED labeledOK/FAIL indicates the status information of the line card.
See “Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch” on page 45.
• Network port LED—One LED per network port indicates the link activity and status of
each port. See “Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch” on page 46.
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch
The line cards in EX9200 switches have an LED labeledOK/FAIL on the faceplate that
indicates the online status information of line cards.
Table 25 on page 45 describes the LED on line cards for EX9200 switches, its colors and
state, and the status it indicates.
Table 25: LED on Line Cards for EX9200 Switches
State and DescriptionColorLED
• On steadily—The line card is functioning normally.
• Blinking—The line card is transitioning online or offline.
GreenOK/FAIL
The line card is not online.Unlit
The line card has failed.Red
45Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Network Port LEDs in an EX9200 Switch
Each SFP, SFP+, QSFP+, CFP, and network port on the faceplate of a line card has an
LED that indicates the link activity of the port. Each 10/100/1000BASE-TRJ-45 Ethernet
network port has two LEDs that indicate link activity and status of each port.
Table 26 on page 46 describes the Link/Activity LED.
Table 26: Network Port LEDs on Line Cards in an EX9200Switch—Link/Activity LED
State and DescriptionColorLED
• On steadily—The port and the link are active,but there is no link activity.
• Blinking—Theport and the linkareactive, andthere is link activity.
• Off—The port is not active.
GreenLink/Activity
TheStatus LED in 10/100/1000BASE-TRJ-45Ethernet networkport indicates the status
ofoneof the threeport parameters. Theport parametersareadministrative status, speed,
and duplex mode status.
Table 27 on page 47 describes the Status LED.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.46
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 27: Network Port LEDs on Line Cards in an EX9200Switch—StatusLED
State, Color, and DescriptionLCD IndicatorLED
Indicates the administrative status (enabled ordisabled). The status indicators are:
• Green—Administrative status enabled.
• Yellow—The port is down.
• Unlit—Administrative status disabled.
LED: ADMStatus
Indicates the speed. The speed indicators aredifferent in the line cards.
LED: SPD
• Unlit—10 Mbps
• Green—Blinking—100Mbps
• Green—On steadily—1000Mbps
Indicates the duplex mode. The statusindicators are:
• Green—Port is set to full-duplex mode.
• Unlit—Port is not set to full-duplex mode.
LED: DPX
RelatedDocumentation
Line Card LED in an EX9200 Switch on page 45•
• Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch on page 17
AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch
An EX9208 switch is configurable with two, three, or four AC power supplies. The power
suppliesconnect to themidplane,whichdistributes thedifferentoutputvoltagesproduced
by thepowersupplies to theswitchcomponents,dependingon their voltage requirements.
Each power supply is cooled by its own internal cooling system.
CAUTION: EX9208 switches use either AC or DC power supplies. Do notmixACandDCpowersupplies inaswitch.The first typeofpowersupplydetectedby the switchwhen initially powered on determines the type of power supplyallowed by the switch. All installed power supplies of the other type aredisabled by the switch. If you install a power supply of the other type whilethe switch is operating, the switch disables the power supply and generatesan alarm.
This topic describes the AC power supplies in EX9208 switches:
• AC Power Supply Description on page 48
• AC Power Supply Configurations on page 49
47Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
AC Power Supply Description
The AC power supplies in EX9208 switches are hot-insertable and hot-removable
field-replaceable units (FRUs).
You can install up to four AC power supplies in an EX9208 switch. Power supplies are
installed in the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right).
WARNING: The switch is installed in a restricted-access location. It has aseparate protective earthing terminal (sized for UNC 1/4-20 ground lugs)provided on the chassis in addition to the grounding pin of the power supplycord. This separate protective earthing terminal must be permanentlyconnected to earth.
CAUTION: Beforeswitch installationbegins, ensure thata licensedelectricianhas attached an appropriate grounding lug to the grounding cable that yousupply. Using a grounding cablewith an incorrectly attached lug candamagethe switch.
Each AC power supply weighs approximately 6.6 lb (2.99 kg) and consists of one AC
appliance inlet, an AC input switch, a fan, and LEDs to monitor the status of the power
supply. See Figure 26 on page 48.
Figure 26: AC Power Supply for an EX9208 Switch
AC OK
DC OKPS
FAIL
Each power supply has its own fan and is cooled by its own internal cooling system.
EX9208 switches support 2520WACpower supply. TheACpower supply supports both
the low-voltage line (100–120VAC) and the high-voltage line (200–240VAC) AC power
configurations.
Each AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet located on the power supply that
requires a dedicated AC power feed.We recommend that you use a customer site circuit
breaker rated for 16.0 A@ 100 VAC or 16.0 A@ 200 VAC circuit breaker minimum for
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.48
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
each AC power supply, or as required by local code. Doing so enables you to operate the
switch in any configuration without upgrading the power infrastructure.
AC Power Supply Configurations
The EX9208 switch supports either the low-line (100–120 V) AC power configuration or
the high-line (200–240 V) AC power configuration.
• In the low-line (100–120V)ACpower configuration, the EX9208 switch contains three
or four AC power supplies, located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0
through PEM3 (left to right). Each AC power supply provides power to all components
in the switch.When three power supplies are present, they share power almost equally
within a fully populated system. FourACpower suppliesprovide full power redundancy.
If onepower supply fails or is removed, the remainingpower supplies assume theentire
electrical load without interruption. Three power supplies provide the maximum
configuration with full power for as long as the switch is operational. The low-line
configuration requires three power supplies and the fourth power supply provides
redundancy.
• In the high-line (200–240 V) AC power configuration, the EX9208 switch contains
two or four AC power supplies, located horizontally at the rear of the chassis in slots
PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right). In a high-line AC power configuration, each AC
power supplyprovidespower toall components in the switch.When twoormorepower
supplies are present, they share power almost equallywithin a fully populated system.
Four AC power supplies provide full power redundancy. If one power supply fails or is
removed, the remaining power supplies assume the entire electrical load without
interruption. Two power supplies provide the maximum configuration with full power
for as long as the switch is operational. In the two-PEM high-line configuration, slots
PEM0 and PEM1 or PEM2 and PEM3 are used. The high-line configuration requires two
power supplies, with the third and fourth providing redundancy.
RelatedDocumentation
AC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches on page 111•
• AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 49
• Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components on page 113
• Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 137
• Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 193
AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch
An AC power supply has three LEDs on its faceplate. These LEDs display information
about the status of the AC power supply. The power supply status is also reflected in
two LEDs on the craft interface. In addition, a power supply failure triggers the major
alarm LED on the craft interface.
Table 28 on page 50 describes the LEDs on an AC power supply in an EX9208 switch.
49Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Table 28: AC Power Supply LEDs on EX9208 Switches
DescriptionColorLED
AC power input is within range. Powersupply is functioning normally.
GreenACOK
AC power input is below the range.Yellow
Indicates one of the following:
• Power supply is disconnected fromACpower feed.
• No AC power input.
Off
DCpoweroutputgeneratedby thepowersupply is within the normal operatingranges.
GreenDCOK
DCpoweroutputgeneratedby thepowersupply is notwithin the normal operatingranges.
Off
Power supply is not functioning normallyand its output voltage is out of regulationlimits. Check ACOK and DCOK LEDs formore information.
RedPS FAIL
Power supply is functioning normally.Off
RelatedDocumentation
AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47•
• Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components on page 113
DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch
AnEX9208switch is configurablewith twoor fourDCpower supplies. Thepower supplies
connect to the midplane, which distributes the different output voltages produced by
the power supplies to the switch components, depending on their voltage requirements.
Each power supply is cooled by its own internal cooling system.
CAUTION: EX9208 switches use either AC or DC power supplies. Do notmixACandDCpowersupplies inaswitch.The first typeofpowersupplydetectedby the switchwhen initially powered on determines the type of power supplyallowed by the switch. All installed power supplies of the other type aredisabled by the switch. If you install a power supply of the other type whilethe switch is operating, the switch disables the power supply and generatesan alarm.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.50
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
This topic describes the DC power supplies in EX9208 switches:
• DC Power Supply Description on page 51
• DC Power Supply Configurations on page 51
DC Power Supply Description
The DC power supplies in EX9000 switches are hot-insertable and hot-removable
field-replaceable units (FRUs).
You can install either twoor four DCpower supplies in an EX9208 switch. Power supplies
are installed in the rear of the chassis in slots PEM0 through PEM3 (left to right).
EachDCpower supplyweighsapproximately6.2 lb (2.81 kg) andconsists of oneDC input
(–48 VDC and return), one 70 A (–48 VDC) circuit breaker, a fan, and LEDs to monitor
the status of the power supply. See Figure 27 on page 51.
Each DC power supply has a single DC input (–48 VDC and return) that requires a
dedicated circuit breaker.We recommend you provision 60Aor 75 A per feed, depending
on the selected DIP switch setting. If you plan to operate amaximally configured
DC-powered switch with DC power supplies, we recommend that you use a dedicated
customer site circuit breaker rated for 70 A (–48 VDC)minimum, or as required by local
code.
If you plan to operate a DC-powered switch at less than themaximum configuration, we
recommend that youprovisionacircuit breaker according to respectiveNational Electrical
Code and customer site internal standards tomaintain proper level of protection for the
current specifiedaboveor eachDCpower supply rated for at least 125%of thecontinuous
current that the system draws at –48 VDC.
Figure 27: DC Power Supply for an EX9208 Switch
DC Power Supply Configurations
In the DC power configuration, the EX9208 switch contains either two or four DC power
supplies located at the rear of the chassis in slotsPEM0 throughPEM3 (left to right). You
can upgrade your DC power system from two to four power supplies.
51Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Four power supplies provide full redundancy. If a DC power supply in a redundant
configuration is removed or fails, its redundant power supply takes over without
interruption. The DC power supply in PEM2 serves as redundant to the DC power supply
in slot PEM0, and the DC power supply in PEM3 serves as redundant to the DC power
supply in slot PEM1. If only two DC power supplies are installed, they must be installed
in slots PEM0 and PEM1 or in slots PEM2 and PEM3.
Table 29 on page 52 shows the components that are powered by each DC power supply
slot. It applies to existing and high-capacity power supplies.
Table 29: Power Supply Redundancy and Power Distribution
Components That Are Supplied PowerDC Power SupplySlot
Fan tray, line card slots 0 and 1, and SF slots 0 and 1PEM0
Fan tray and line card slots 2 through 5PEM1
Fan tray, line card slots 0 and 1, and SF slots 0 and 1PEM2
Fan tray and line card slots 2 through 5PEM3
RelatedDocumentation
DC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches on page 112•
• DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 52
• Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components on page 113
• Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 139
• Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 195
DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch
ADC power supply has three LEDs on its faceplate:POWEROK, BRKRON, and INPUTOK
LEDs. The power supply status is also reflected in two LEDs on the craft interface. In
addition, a power supply failure triggers the major alarm LED on the craft interface.
NOTE: A host subsystemmust be present for the POWEROK LED to be on.
Table 30 on page 53 describes the LEDs on a DC power supply in EX9208 switches.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.52
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 30: DC Power Supply LEDs in EX9208 Switches
DescriptionColorLED
Power supply is functioning normally.GreenPOWEROK
Themain output voltage is out of range.Yellow
Power supply is not functioningnormally.Check the INPUTOK LED for moreinformation.
Off
DC power input is present and the DCpower supply circuit breaker is turned on.
GreenBRKRON
DCpower supply circuit breaker is turnedoff.
Off
DC input is present and is connected incorrect polarity.
GreenINPUTOK
DC input is present, but is not in validoperating range or connected in reversepolarity.
Yellow
DC input to the power supply is notpresent.
Off
RelatedDocumentation
DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50•
• Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components on page 113
Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch
Thecooling system inanEX9208switchconsistsof a fan trayandanair filter. Thecooling
systemcomponentswork together to keep all switch componentswithin the acceptable
temperature range.
This topic describes:
• Fan Tray on page 53
• Airflow Direction in the EX9208 Switch Chassis on page 54
Fan Tray
Fan tray is ahot-insertableandhot-removable field-replaceableunit (FRU)andcontains
six fans. The fan tray and air filter install vertically in the rear of the switch. See
Figure 28 on page 54 and Figure 29 on page 54.
53Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Figure 28: Fan Tray for an EX9208 Switch
Figure 29: Air Filter for an EX9208 Switch
Airflow Direction in the EX9208 Switch Chassis
The air intake to cool the chassis is located on the side of the chassis next to the air filter.
Air is pulled through the chassis toward the fan tray, where it is exhausted out through
the side of the chassis. The air intake to cool the power supplies is located in the front of
the chassis above the craft interface. See Figure 30 on page 55.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.54
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 30: Airflow Through the EX9208 Switch Chassis
Fan tray
Card cage
g022
025
Front viewAirflow (front boards)
Side viewAirflow (power supplies)
Front
Air filter Air filter
Airintake
Air intakePower supply exhaust
Fan tray
Rear
Card cage
Rear viewAirflow (front boards)
The host subsystemmonitors the temperature of switch components. Under normal
operating conditions, the fans in the fan tray run at less than full speed. If a fan fails or
the ambient temperature rises above a threshold, the speed of the remaining fans is
automatically adjusted to keep the temperature within the acceptable range. If the
ambient maximum temperature specification is exceeded and the system cannot be
adequately cooled, theRoutingEngine shuts down the systembydisabling output power
from each power supply.
You cannot replace a single fan. If one or more fans fail, you must replace the entire fan
tray.
RelatedDocumentation
• Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27
• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch on page 141
• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch on page 197
55Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 2: Component Descriptions
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.56
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 3
Component Specifications
• USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch on page 57
• Console Port and AUX Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200
Switch on page 58
• RJ-45 toDB-9SerialPortAdapterPinout Information foranEXSeriesSwitchonpage59
• Ethernet Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200 Switch on page 60
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches on page 60
• Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications for EX9200 Switches on page 85
USB Port Specifications for an EX Series Switch
The following Juniper Networks USB flash drives have been tested and are officially
supported for the USB port on all EX Series switches:
• RE-USB-1G-S
• RE-USB-2G-S
• RE-USB-4G-S
CAUTION: Any USBmemory product not listed as supported for EX Seriesswitches has not been tested by Juniper Networks. The use of anyunsupported USBmemory product could expose your EX Series switch tounpredictablebehavior. JuniperNetworksTechnicalAssistanceCenter (JTAC)can provide only limited support for issues related to unsupported hardware.We strongly recommend that you use only supported USB flash drives.
All USB flash drives used on EX Series switches must have the following features:
• USB 2.0 or later.
• Formatted with a FAT or MS-DOS file system.
• If the switch is running Junos OS Release 9.5 or earlier, the formatting methodmust
use amaster boot record. Microsoft Windows formatting, by default, does not use a
master boot record. See the documentation for your USB flash drive for information
about how your USB flash drive is formatted.
57Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
RelatedDocumentation
EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview•
• Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch
• Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch
• Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch
• EX4300 Switches Hardware Overview
• Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch
• Management Panel of an EX4600 Switch
• EX4550 Switches Hardware Overview
• Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX6200 Switch
• Switch Fabric and Routing Engine (SRE) Module in an EX8208 Switch
• Routing Engine (RE) Module in an EX8216 Switch
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
• Booting an EX Series Switch Using a Software Package Stored on a USB Flash Drive
Console Port and AUX Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200 Switch
Theconsole port andAUXport onanEXSeries switchareRS-232 serial interfaces. These
ports connect the switch to an auxiliary or console management ports.
Table 31 on page 58 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 connector. An RJ-45
cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the switch.
NOTE: If your laptopor PCdoes not have aDB-9male connector pin and youwant to connect your laptop or PC directly to an EX9200 switch, use acombination of the RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the switchand a USB to DB-9male adapter. Youmust provide the USB to DB-9maleadapter.
Table 31: EX9200SwitchesConsolePort andAUXPortConnectorPinoutInformation
DescriptionSignalPin
Request to sendRTS1
Data terminal readyDTR2
Transmit dataTxD3
Signal groundGround4
Signal groundGround5
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.58
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 31: EX9200SwitchesConsolePort andAUXPortConnectorPinoutInformation (continued)
DescriptionSignalPin
Receive dataRxD6
Data set readyDSR/DCD7
Clear to sendCTS8
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary Device on
page 166
•
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter Pinout Information for an EX Series Switch
The console port on an EX Series switch is an RS-232 serial interface that uses an RJ-45
connector to connect to amanagement device such as a PC or a laptop. If your laptop
or PC does not have a DB-9male connector pin and you want to connect your laptop or
PC to an EX Series switch, use a combination of the RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter
supplied with the switch along with a USB to DB-9male adapter.
Table 32 on page 59 provides the pinout information for the RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port
adapter.
Table 32: EX Series Switches RJ-45 to DB-9 Serial Port Adapter PinoutInformation
SignalDB-9 PinSignalRJ-45 Pin
CTS8RTS1
DSR6DTR2
RXD2TXD3
GND5GND4
TXD3RXD6
DTR4DSR7
RTS7CTS8
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting an EX Series Switch to a Management Console•
• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)
59Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
• Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary Device on
page 166
• Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 182
Ethernet Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200 Switch
The Ethernet (<...>) port on an EX9200 switch uses an RJ-45 connector to connect to a
management device for out-of-bandmanagement.
The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support a 10/100-Mbps Ethernet
connection. Two LEDs on the port indicate link activity on the port and the administrative
status of the port.
Table 33 on page 60 provides the pinout information of the RJ-45 connector. An RJ-45
cable, with a connector attached, is supplied with the switch.
Table 33: Ethernet Port Connector Pinout Information for EX9200Switches
SignalPin
TX+1
TX–2
RX+3
Termination network4
Termination network5
RX–6
Termination network7
Termination network8
RelatedDocumentation
ConnectinganEX9200Switch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 165•
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX9200 Switches
The linecards in EX9200 switches support SFP, SFP+, QSFP+, and CFP transceivers.
This topic describes the optical interfaces supported for those transceivers.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.60
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and opticalconnectors purchased from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networksdevice.
CAUTION: If you are having a problem running a Juniper Networks devicethat is using a third-party optic or cable, the Juniper Networks TechnicalAssistance Center (JTAC) can help you diagnose the source of the problem.Your JTAC engineer might recommend that you check the third-party opticor cable and potentially replace it with an equivalent Juniper Networks opticor cable that is qualified for the device.
The Gigabit Ethernet SFP, SFP+, and QSFP+transceivers and 100GBASE-LR4 CFP
transceiver installed in EX9200 switches support digital optical monitoring (DOM): You
can view the diagnostic details for these transceivers by issuing the operational mode
CLI command show interfaces diagnostics optics.
The tables in this topicdescribe theoptical interface support over single-mode fiber-optic
(SMF) andmultimode fiber-optic (MMF) cables for SFP, SFP+, QSFP+, and CFP
transceivers:
• Table 34 on page 62—Optical interface support for SFP transceivers.
• Table 35 on page 76—Optical interface support for SFP+ transceivers.
• Table 36 on page 81—Optical interface support for QSFP+ transceivers.
• Table 37 on page 83—Optical interface support for CFP transceivers.
61Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-1GE-TModel number1000BASE-T
10/100/1000MbpsRate
RJ-45Connector type
CopperFiber Count
–Transmitter wavelength
–Minimum launch power
–Maximum launch power
–Minimum receiver sensitivity
–Maximum input power
CopperFiber type
–Core size
–Modal bandwidth
328 ft (100m)Distance
Not availableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.62
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-1GE-SXModel number1000BASE-SX
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
850 nmTransmitter wavelength
–9.5 dBmMinimum launch power
–3 dBmMaximum launch power
–21 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
0 dBmMaximum input power
MMFFiber type
62.5/125 µm62.5/125 µmCore size
OM1FDDIFiber grade
200MHz/km160MHz/kmModal bandwidth
902 ft (275m)721 ft (220m)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
63Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-1FE-FXModel number100BASE-FX
100MbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1310 nmTransmitter wavelength
–20 dBmMinimum launch power
–14 dBmMaximum launch power
–32.5 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–8 dBmMaximum input power
MMFFiber type
50/125 µm62.5/125 µmCore/Cladding size
OM2FDDI/OM1Fiber grade
–500 MHz/kmModal bandwidth
1.2 miles (2 km)1.2 miles (2 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.64
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-1GE-LXModel number1000BASE-LX
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1310 nmTransmitter wavelength
–9.5 dBmMinimum launch power
–3 dBmMaximum launch power
–25 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore size
–Modal bandwidth
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
65Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-GE10KT13R14Model number1000BASE-BX-U
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
SingleFiber count
1310 nmTransmitter wavelength
1490 nmReceiver wavelength
–9 dBmMinimum launch power
–3 dBmMaximum launch power
–30 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.66
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-GE10KT14R13Model number1000BASE-BX-D
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
SingleFiber count
1490 nmTransmitter wavelength
1310 nmReceiver wavelength
–9 dBmMinimum launch power
–3 dBmMaximum launch power
–30 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
67Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-GE10KT13R15Model number1000BASE-BX-U
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
SingleFiber count
1310 nmTransmitter wavelength
1550 nmReceiver wavelength
–9 dBmMinimum launch power
–3 dBmMaximum launch power
–21 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.68
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-GE10KT15R13Model number1000BASE-BX-D
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
SingleFiber count
1550 nmTransmitter wavelength
1310 nmReceiver wavelength
–9 dBmMinimum launch power
–3 dBmMaximum launch power
–21 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
69Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-FE20KT13R15Model number100BASE-BX-U
100MbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1310 nmTransmitter wavelength
1550 nmReceiver wavelength
–14 dBmMinimum launch power
–8 dBmMaximum launch power
–45 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–8 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
12.4 miles (20 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.70
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-FE20KT15R13Model number100BASE-BX-D
100MbpsRate
LCConnector type
SingleFiber count
1550 nmTransmitter wavelength
1310 nmReceiver wavelength
–14 dBmMinimum launch power
–8 dBmMaximum launch power
–45 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–8 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
12.4 miles (20 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
71Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-GE40KT13R15Model number1000BASE-BX-U
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
SingleFiber count
1310 nmTransmitter wavelength
1550 nmReceiver wavelength
–6.5 dBmMinimum launch power
2 dBmMaximum launch power
–23 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
24.85miles (40 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.72
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-GE40KT15R13Model number1000BASE-BX-D
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
SingleFiber count
1550 nmTransmitter wavelength
1310 nmReceiver wavelength
–6.5 dBmMinimum launch power
2 dBmMaximum launch power
–23 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
24.85miles (40 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
73Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-1GE-LX40KModel number1000BASE-LX
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1310 nmTransmitter wavelength
–14 dBmMinimum launch power
–8 dBmMaximum launch power
–45 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
24.85miles (40 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.74
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table34:Optical InterfaceSupport forFastEthernetandGigabitEthernetSFP Transceivers in EX9200 Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
EX-SFP-1GE-LHModel number1000BASE-LH (or1000BASE-ZX)
1000MbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1550 nmTransmitter wavelength
–2 dBmMinimum launch power
5 dBmMaximum launch power
–25 dBmMinimum receiver sensitivity
–3 dBmMaximum input power
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
–Modal bandwidth
43.5 miles (70 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches,Release 12.3R2 or later
Software required
75Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 35: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in EX9200Switches
ValueSpecificationEthernetStandard
EX-SFP-10GE-USRModel number10GBASE-USR
10 GbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
850 nmTransmitterwavelength
–7.3 dBmMinimum launchpower
–1.3 dBmMaximum launchpower
–11.1 dBmMinimum receiversensitivity
–1.0 dBmMaximum inputpower
MMFFiber type
50/125µm
50/125µm
62.5/125µm
Core/Claddingsize
OM3OM3OM1Fiber grade
1500MHz/km
500MHz/km
200MHz/km
Modal bandwidth
328 ft(100m)
98.4 ft(30m)
32.8 ft(10 m)
Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 12.3R2 or laterSoftware required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.76
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 35: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in EX9200Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernetStandard
EX-SFP-10GE-SRModel number10GBASE-SR
10 GbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
850 nmTransmitterwavelength
–7.3 dBmMinimum launchpower
–1 dBmMaximum launchpower
–9.9 dBmMinimum receiversensitivity
–1 dBmMaximum inputpower
MMFFiber type
50/125µm
50/125µm
50/125µm
62.5/125µm
62.5/125µm
Core/Claddingsize
OM3OM2–OM1FDDIFiber grade
1500MHz/km
500MHz/km
400MHz/km
200MHz/km
160MHz/km
Modal bandwidth
984 ft(300m)
269 ft(82m)
216 ft(66m)
108 ft(33m)
85 ft(26m)
Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 12.3R2 or laterSoftware required
77Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 35: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in EX9200Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernetStandard
EX-SFP-10GE-LRModel number10GBASE-LR
10 GbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1310 nmTransmitterwavelength
–8.2 dBmMinimum launchpower
0.5 dBmMaximum launchpower
–18 dBmMinimum receiversensitivity
0.5 dBmMaximum inputpower
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Claddingsize
–Modal bandwidth
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 12.3R2 or laterSoftware required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.78
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 35: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in EX9200Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernetStandard
EX-SFP-10GE-ERModel number10GBASE-ER
10 GbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1550 nmTransmitterwavelength
–4.7 dBmMinimum launchpower
4 dBmMaximum launchpower
–11.3 dBmMinimum receiversensitivity
–1 dBmMaximum inputpower
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Claddingsize
–Modal bandwidth
24.8 miles (40 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 12.3R2 or laterSoftware required
79Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 35: Optical Interface Support for SFP+ Transceivers in EX9200Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernetStandard
EX-SFP-10GE-ZRModel number10GBASE-ZR
10 GbpsRate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1550 nmTransmitterwavelength
0 dBmMinimum launchpower
5 dBmMaximum launchpower
–20 dBmMinimum receiversensitivity
–8 dBmMaximum inputpower
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Claddingsize
–Modal bandwidth
49.7 miles (80 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release 12.3R2 or laterSoftware required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.80
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 36: Optical Interface Support for QSFP+ Transceivers in EX9200Switches
ValueSpecificationEthernetStandard
QFX-QSFP-40GE-SR4Model number40GBASE-SR4
40 GbpsRate
12-ribbonmultimode fiber crossover cablewith female MTP connectors
Connector type
12Fiber count
850 nmTransmitter wavelength
–7.6 dBmMinimum launch power
2.4 dBmMaximum launch power
– 5.4 dBmMaximum ReceiverSensitivity
4 dBmMaximum input power
MMFFiber type
50/125 µm50/125 µmCore/Cladding size
OM4OM3Fiber grade
4700MHz/km2000MHz/kmModal bandwidth
492 ft (150m)328 ft (100m)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release12.3R2 or later
Software required
81Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 36: Optical Interface Support for QSFP+ Transceivers in EX9200Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernetStandard
JNP-QSFP-40G-LR4Model number40GBASE-LR4
40 Gbps (10 Gbps per Lane)Rate
LCConnector type
DualFiber count
1264.5 nm through 1277.5 nm
1284.5 nm through 1297.5 nm
1304.5 nm through 1317.5 nm
1324.5 nm through 1337.5 nm
Transmitter wavelength(per Lane)
–7.0 dBmMinimum launch power(per Lane)
2.3 dBmMaximum launch power(per Lane)
– 11.5 dBmMaximum ReceiverSensitivity (per Lane)
3.3 dBmMaximum inputpower (perLane)
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Series switches, Release12.3R2 or later
Software required
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.82
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 37: Optical Interface Support for CFP Transceivers in EX9200Switches
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
CFP-100GBASE-SR10Model number100GBASE-SR10
MultimodeOptical interface
100 GbpsRate
IEEE 802.3ba—2010Standard
840 nm through 860 nmTransmitter wavelength per lane
–7.6 dBm through 2.4 dBmAverage launch power per lane
–9.5 dBm through 2.4 dBmfor OM3
–9.1 dBm through 2.4 dBmfor OM4
Average receive power per lane
2.4 dBmReceiver saturation per lane
–9.5 dBm for OM3
–9.1 dBm for OM4
Receiver sensitivity per lane
MMFFiber type
OM3Fiber grade
328 ft (100m)Distance
Not availableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Seriesswitches, Release 13.2R1 orlater
Software required
83Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Table 37: Optical Interface Support for CFP Transceivers in EX9200Switches (continued)
ValueSpecificationEthernet Standard
CFP-GEN2-100GBASE-LR4Model number100GBASE-LR4
Single-modeOptical interface
100 GbpsRate
IEEE 802.3ba-2010Standard
1294.53 nm through1296.59 nm
1299.02 nm through1301.09 nm
1303.54 nm through1305.63 nm
1308.09 nm through1310.19 nm
Transmitter wavelength per lane
–4.3 dBm through 4.5 dBmAverage launch power per lane
10.5 dBmMaximum launch power
–10.6dBmthrough4.5dBmAverage receive power per lane
4.5 dBmReceiver saturation per lane
–10.6 dBmReceiver sensitivity per lane
SMFFiber type
9/125 µmCore/Cladding size
6.2 miles (10 km)Distance
AvailableDOM support
Junos OS for EX Seriesswitches, Release 13.2R1 orlater
Software required
RelatedDocumentation
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 154•
• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 207
• EX9200-2C-8XS Line Card on page 37
• EX9200-32XS Line Card on page 41
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.84
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• EX9200-4QS Line Card on page 38
• EX9200-6QS Line Card on page 39
• EX9200-40T Line Card on page 42
• EX9200-40F Line Card on page 43
• EX9200-40F-M Line Card on page 44
Grounding Cable and Lug Specifications for EX9200 Switches
To ensure proper operation and to meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
requirements, youmust connect an EX9200 switch to earth ground before you connect
power to the switch. Youmust use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis
to connect the switch to earth ground.
WARNING: The switch is installed in a restricted-access location. It has aseparateprotectiveearthingterminalonthechassis thatmustbepermanentlyconnected to earth ground to adequately ground the chassis and protect theoperator from electrical hazards.
CAUTION: Beforeswitch installationbegins, ensure thata licensedelectricianhas attached an appropriate grounding lug to the grounding cable that yousupply. Using a grounding cablewith an incorrectly attached lug candamagethe switch.
This topic describes:
• Grounding Points Specifications for an EX9200 Switch on page 85
• Grounding Cable Lug Specifications for an EX9200 Switch on page 86
• Grounding Cable Specifications for an EX9200 Switch on page 86
Grounding Points Specifications for an EX9200 Switch
Tomeet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
proper operation, the switch must be adequately grounded before power is connected.
To ground AC-powered and DC-powered switches, youmust connect a grounding cable
to earth ground and then attach it to the chassis grounding points using the two screws
provided.
Two threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the upper rear of the chassis for
connecting the switch to earth ground. The grounding points fit UNC 1/4–20 screws
(American). The grounding points are spaced at 0.625 in. (15.86mm) centers.
85Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
NOTE: Additional grounding is provided to anAC-powered switchwhen youplug its power supplies into grounded AC power receptacles.
Grounding Cable Lug Specifications for an EX9200 Switch
The accessory box shipped with the switch includes one cable lug that attaches to the
grounding cable (see Figure 31 on page 86) and two UNC 1/4–20 screws used to secure
the grounding cable to the grounding points.
Figure 31: Grounding Lug for an EX9200 Switch
Crimp area
6 AWG conductor
All measurements in inches
0.28diametereach hole
2.25
0.25 0.370.625 g001
188
0.55
End view
0.08
CAUTION: Before switch installation begins, a licensed electricianmustattachacable lug to thegroundingandpower cables that you supply. A cablewith an incorrectly attached lug can damage the switch.
NOTE: The same cable lug is used for the DC power cables.
Grounding Cable Specifications for an EX9200 Switch
Thegroundingcable that youprovidemustmeet thespecifications inTable38onpage86.
Table 38: Grounding Cable Specifications
Quantity and SpecificationCable Type
One 6 AWG (13.3 mm2), minimum 60°C wire, or one thatcomplies with the by the local code
For DC-powered EX9214 switches, the 48 VDC facility mustbe equippedwith a circuit breaker rated 40 A (–48 VDC), or60A(–48VDC), and thegroundingcablemustbeminimum10 AWG, or one that complies with the by the local code.
Grounding
WARNING: The switch is pluggable type A equipment installed in arestricted-access location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal(sized for UNC 1/4-20 ground lugs) provided on the chassis in addition to the
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.86
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
grounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthingterminal must be permanently connected to earth.
RelatedDocumentation
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
87Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 3: Component Specifications
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.88
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 2
Planning for Switch Installation
• Site Preparation on page 91
• Rack and Cabinet Requirements on page 101
• Cable Requirements on page 107
• Planning Power Requirements on page 111
89Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.90
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 4
Site Preparation
• Site Preparation Checklist for an EX9208 Switch on page 91
• General Site Guidelines on page 93
• Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 94
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 96
Site Preparation Checklist for an EX9208 Switch
Thechecklist inTable39onpage91 summarizes the tasksyouneed toperformtoprepare
a site for installing an EX9200 switch.
Table 39: Site Preparation Checklist
DatePerformedbyFor More InformationItem or Task
Environment
“EnvironmentalRequirements andSpecifications for EX SeriesSwitches” on page 96
Verify that environmental factorssuch as temperature and humiditydo not exceed switch tolerances.
Power
Measuredistancebetweenexternalpower sources and switchinstallation site.
91Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table 39: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)
DatePerformedbyFor More InformationItem or Task
“AC Power SupplySpecifications for EX9208Switches” on page 111
“DC Power SupplySpecifications for EX9208Switches” on page 112
“Power Requirements forEX9200 SwitchComponents” on page 113
“Calculating the EX SeriesSwitch Fiber-Optic CablePower Budget” on page 116
“Calculating the EX SeriesSwitch Fiber-Optic CablePower Margin” on page 117
Calculate the power consumptionand requirements.
Rack or Cabinet
“Rack Requirements for anEX9200Switch”onpage101
“Cabinet Requirements foran EX9200 Switch” onpage 103
Select the type of rack or cabinetand verify that it meets theminimum requirements for theinstallation of the switch.
“Clearance Requirementsfor Airflow and HardwareMaintenance foranEX9208Switch” on page 104
Plan rack or cabinet location,ensuring the required spaceclearances.
“Rack Requirements for anEX9200Switch”onpage101
“Cabinet Requirements foran EX9200 Switch” onpage 103
Secure the rack or cabinet to thefloor and building structure.
Cables
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.92
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 39: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)
DatePerformedbyFor More InformationItem or Task
Plan the cable routing andmanagement.
Acquire cables and connectors:
• Determine the number of cablesneeded based on your plannedconfiguration.
• Ensure that thedistancebetweenhardware components to beconnected allows for cablelengths tobewithin the specifiedmaximum limits.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129
• Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift on
page 132
General Site Guidelines
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Efficient device operation requires proper site planning andmaintenance and proper
layout of the equipment, rack or cabinet (if used), and wiring closet.
To plan and create an acceptable operating environment for your device and prevent
environmentally caused equipment failures:
• Keep the area around the chassis free from dust and conductive material, such as
metal flakes.
• Followprescribedairflowguidelines toensure that thecoolingsystemfunctionsproperly
and that exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the
device.
• Follow the prescribed electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention procedures to prevent
damaging the equipment. Static discharge can cause components to fail completely
or intermittently over time.
• Install the device in a secure area, so that only authorized personnel can access the
device.
93Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 4: Site Preparation
RelatedDocumentation
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 280•
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches on page 96
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for OCX1100 Switches
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for a QFX3100 Director Device
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for a QFX3500 Device
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for QFX3600 and QFX3600-I Devices
• Environmental Requirements and Specifications for a QFX5100 Device
Site ElectricalWiring Guidelines
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Table40onpage94describes the factors youmustconsiderwhileplanning theelectrical
wiring at your site.
WARNING: It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded andshielded environment and to use electrical surge-suppression devices.
Table 40: Site ElectricalWiring Guidelines
GuidelinesSiteWiring Factor
If your site experiences any of the following problems, consult experts inelectrical surge suppression and shielding:
• Improperly installed wires cause radio frequency interference (RFI).
• Damage from lightning strikesoccurswhenwiresexceed recommendeddistances or pass between buildings.
• Electromagneticpulses (EMPs)causedby lightningdamageunshieldedconductors and electronic devices.
Signaling limitations
To reduce or eliminate RFI from your site wiring, do the following:
• Use a twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of groundingconductors.
• If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-qualitytwisted-pair cablewithonegroundconductor for eachdata signalwhenapplicable.
Radio frequencyinterference
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.94
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 40: Site ElectricalWiring Guidelines (continued)
GuidelinesSiteWiring Factor
If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility(EMC), particularly from lightningor radio transmitters, seek expert advice.
Some of the problems caused by strong sources of electromagneticinterference (EMI) are:
• Destruction of the signal drivers and receivers in the switch
• Electrical hazards as a result of power surges conducted over the linesinto the equipment
Electromagneticcompatibility
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 280
• Power Supply in EX2200 Switches
• Power Supply in EX3200 Switches
• Power Supply in EX3300 Switches
• Power Supply in EX4200 Switches
• AC Power Supply in EX4300 Switches
• DC Power Supply in EX4300 Switches
• AC Power Supply in EX4500 Switches
• DC Power Supply in EX4500 Switches
• AC Power Supply in EX4550 Switches
• DC Power Supply in EX4550 Switches
• AC Power Supply in an EX4600 Switch
• DC Power Supply in an EX4600 Switch
• AC Power Supplies in an EX6200 Switch
• DC Power Supply in an EX6200 Switch
• AC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
• DC Power Supply in an EX8200 Switch
• AC Power Supply in an EX9204 Switch
• DC Power Supply in an EX9204 Switch
• AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47
• DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50
• AC Power Supply in an EX9214 Switch
• DC Power Supply in an EX9214 Switch
95Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 4: Site Preparation
• Power Supply in an EX Series Redundant Power System
• AC Power Supply in OCX1100 Switches
• DC Power Supply in OCX1100 Switches
• AC Power Supply in a QFX3100 Director Device
• AC Power Supply in a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device
• Wiring Tray in a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device
• AC Power Supply for a QFX3500, QFX3600, or QFX3600-I Device
• DC Power Supply for a QFX3500, QFX3600, or QFX3600-I Device
• AC Power Supply for a QFX5100 Device
• DC Power Supply in a QFX5100 Device
Environmental Requirements and Specifications for EX Series Switches
The switch must be installed in a rack or cabinet housed in a dry, clean, well-ventilated,
and temperature-controlled environment.
Ensure that these environmental guidelines are followed:
• The site must be as dust-free as possible, because dust can clog air intake vents and
filters, reducing the efficiency of the switch cooling system.
• Maintain ambient airflow for normal switch operation. If the airflow is blocked or
restricted, or if the intake air is too warm, the switch might overheat, leading to the
switch temperature monitor shutting down the switch to protect the hardware
components.
Table 41 on page 96 provides the required environmental conditions for normal switch
operation.
Table 41: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances
Environment Tolerance
Switch ordevice SeismicTemperatureRelative HumidityAltitude
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through104° F (0° C through 40° C) ataltitudes up to 5,000 ft(1,524m).
For information about extendedtemperatureSFPs, seePluggableTransceivers Supported onEX2200 Switches.
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to5,000 feet(1524meters)
EX2200-C
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.96
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 41: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (continued)
Environment Tolerance
Switch ordevice SeismicTemperatureRelative HumidityAltitude
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through113° F (0° C through 45° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX2200(exceptEX2200-Cswitches)
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through113° F (0° C through 45° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX3200
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through113° F (0° C through 45° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX3300
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through113° F (0° C through 45° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX4200
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through113° F (0° C through 45° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX4300
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through113° F (0° C through 45° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX4500
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
• EX4550-32Fswitches—Normal operationensured in the temperaturerange 32° F through 113° F (0°C through 45° C)
• EX4550-32Tswitches—Normal operationis ensured in the temperaturerange 32° F through 104° F(0° C through 40° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX4550
97Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 4: Site Preparation
Table 41: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (continued)
Environment Tolerance
Switch ordevice SeismicTemperatureRelative HumidityAltitude
Designed to complywith Zone 4earthquakerequirements perNEBS GR-63-CORE,Issue 4.
• Normal operation ensured intemperature range of 32° Fthrough 104° F (0° C through40° C)
• Nonoperating storagetemperature in shippingcontainer: –40° F through158°F(–40°Cthrough70°C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of5% through 90%,noncondensing
• Short-term operationensured in relativehumidity range of 5%through 93%,noncondensing
NOTE: As defined inNEBSGR-63-CORE, Issue4, short-term events canbe up to 96 hours induration but not morethan 15 days per year.
No performancedegradation to6,562 feet(2000meters)
EX4600
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX6210
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX8208
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet(3048meters)
EX8216
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Nonoperating storagetemperature in shippingcontainer: –40° F (–40° C) to158° F (70° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of5% through 90%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX9204
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Nonoperating storagetemperature in shippingcontainer: –40° F (–40° C) to158° F (70° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of5% through 90%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX9208
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.98
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 41: EX Series Switch Environmental Tolerances (continued)
Environment Tolerance
Switch ordevice SeismicTemperatureRelative HumidityAltitude
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range32°F through104° F (0° C through 40° C)
Nonoperating storagetemperature in shippingcontainer: –40° F (–40° C) to158° F (70° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of5% through 90%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
EX9214
Complies with Zone 4earthquakerequirements as perGR-63, Issue 4.
Normal operation ensured in thetemperature range41° F through104° F (5° C through 40° C)
Normaloperationensured inrelative humidity range of10% through 85%(noncondensing)
No performancedegradation up to10,000 feet (3048meters)
XRE200
NOTE: Install EX Series switches only in restricted areas, such as dedicatedequipment roomsandequipmentclosets, inaccordancewithArticles 110–16,110–17, and 110–18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
RelatedDocumentation
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX2200 Switches•
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3200 Switches
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX3300 Switches
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4200 Switches
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4300 Switches
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX4600 Switch
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX Series
Redundant Power System
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4500 Switches
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for EX4550 Switches
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX6210 Switch
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8208 Switch
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX8216 Switch
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX9204 Switch
• ClearanceRequirements forAirflowandHardwareMaintenance for anEX9208Switch
on page 104
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX9214 Switch
99Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 4: Site Preparation
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.100
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 5
Rack and Cabinet Requirements
• Rack Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 101
• Cabinet Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 103
• Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an EX9208
Switch on page 104
Rack Requirements for an EX9200 Switch
The EX9200 switch can be installed in a rack. Many types of racks are acceptable,
including four-post racks and open-frame racks.
Rack requirements consist of:
• Mounting bracket hole spacing
• Rack size and strength
• Rack connection to the building structure
Table 42 on page 102 summarizes rack requirements and specifications for EX9200
switches.
101Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table 42: Rack Requirements and Specifications for an EX9200 Switch
GuidelinesRack Requirement
• Ensure that the rack is a 19-in. rackasdefined inCabinets, Racks,Panels, and Associated Equipment (document numberEIA-310–D) published by the Electronics Industry Association(http://www.eia.org) .
• With the use of adapters or approved wing devices to narrowthe opening between the rails, the switch fits into a600mm-wide rack or cabinet , as defined in the four-partEquipment Engineering (EE); European telecommunicationsstandard for equipment practice (document number ETSI EN300 119) published by the European TelecommunicationsStandards Institute (http://www.etsi.org) .
• The rack railsmust be spacedwidely enough to accommodatethe switch chassis's external dimensions (seeChassis PhysicalSpecifications of an EX9204 Switch, “Chassis PhysicalSpecifications of an EX9208 Switch” on page 7, and ChassisPhysical Specifications of an EX9214 Switch). The spacing ofrails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearancesaround the switch and rack.
• In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mountrack because themore even distribution of weight in thecenter-mount rack provides greater stability.
• The chassis height of 14.0 in. (35.6 cm) is approximately 8 U.AU is the standard rackunit defined inCabinets, Racks, Panels,and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D)published by the Electronics Industry Association.
• The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of thefully configured switch (see Chassis Physical Specifications ofan EX9204 Switch, “Chassis Physical Specifications of anEX9208Switch” on page 7, andChassis Physical Specificationsof anEX9214Switch). . If you stack the rackwith fully configuredswitches, the rackmustbecapableof supporting thecombinedweight.
Rack size and strength
The switch canbemounted inany rack thatprovidesholesor holepatterns spaced at 1 U (1.75 in.) increments. Themountingbrackets used to attach the chassis to a rack are designed tofasten to holes spaced at those distances.
Mounting bracket holespacing
• Secure the rack to the building structure.
• If earthquakesareapossibility in your geographical area, securethe rack to the floor.
• Secure the rack to the ceiling brackets as well as wall or floorbrackets for maximum stability.
Rack connection to thebuilding structure
RelatedDocumentation
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 267•
• Cabinet Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 103
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.102
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Cabinet Requirements for an EX9200 Switch
You canmount an EX9200 switch on a cabinet that contains a 19-in. rack as defined in
Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D)
published by the Electronics Industry Association (http://www.eia.org) .
Cabinet requirements consist of:
• Cabinet size and clearance
• Cabinet airflow requirements
Table 43 on page 103 summarizes cabinet requirements and specifications for EX9200
switches.
Table43:CabinetRequirementsandSpecifications foranEX9200Switch
Guidelines for the EX9200 SwitchCabinet Requirement
• Theminimum cabinet size that canaccommodate the switch is 482mmwideand800mmdeep.Acabinet larger than theminimum requirement provides betterairflow and reduces the chance ofoverheating. To accommodate a singleswitch, the cabinet must be at least 13 Uhigh.
A U is the standard rack unit defined inCabinets, Racks, Panels, and AssociatedEquipment (document number EIA-310–D)published by the Electronics IndustryAssociation (http://www.eia.org) .
• Theminimum front and rear clearancerequirements depend on themountingconfiguration you choose. Theminimumtotal clearance inside the cabinet is 30.7 in.between the inside of the front door and theinside of the rear door.
Cabinet size and clearance
103Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 5: Rack and Cabinet Requirements
Table 43: Cabinet Requirements and Specifications for an EX9200Switch (continued)
Guidelines for the EX9200 SwitchCabinet Requirement
When youmount the switch on a cabinet,ensure that ventilation through the cabinet issufficient to prevent overheating. Consider thefollowing requirements list when planning forchassis cooling:
• Ensure that the cool air supply you providethrough the cabinet adequately dissipatesthe thermal output of the switch (orswitches).
• Ensure that the cabinet allows the chassishot exhaust air to exit the cabinet withoutrecirculating into theswitch.Anopencabinet(without a top or doors) that employs hotair exhaust extraction from the top allowsthe best airflow through the chassis. If thecabinet containsa topordoors, perforationsin these elements assist with removing thehot air exhaust.
• The switch fans exhaust hot air through theright side of the chassis (the left side whenyou face the front of the chassis, where thefan tray slides in). Install the switch in thecabinet in a way that maximizes the openspaceon the fan tray sideof thechassis. Thismaximizes the clearance for critical airflow.
• Route and dress all cables to minimize theblockage of airflow to and from the chassis.
• Ensure that the spacingof rails andadjacentracksallows for theproper clearancearoundthe switch and rack.
Cabinet airflow requirements
RelatedDocumentation
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 267•
• Rack Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 101
• Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX9204 Switch
• Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX9208 Switch on page 7
• Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX9214 Switch
ClearanceRequirements forAirflowandHardwareMaintenanceforanEX9208Switch
When planning the site for installing an EX9208 switch, youmust allow sufficient
clearance around the switch.
• For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be
unrestricted. Allow at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance between side-cooled switches.
Allow 2.8 in. (7.1 cm) between the side of the chassis and any non-heat-producing
surface such as a wall. See Figure 32 on page 105.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.104
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 32: Airflow Through the EX9208 Switch Chassis
Fan tray
Card cage
g022
025
Front viewAirflow (front boards)
Side viewAirflow (power supplies)
Front
Air filter Air filter
Airintake
Air intakePower supply exhaust
Fan tray
Rear
Card cage
Rear viewAirflow (front boards)
• If you aremounting the switch on a rack or cabinet alongwith other equipment, ensure
that the exhaust from other equipment does not blow into the intake vents of the
chassis.
Airflowmust always be from front to back with respect to the rack. If the device has
side to rear airflow, then provisions must bemade to ensure that fresh air from the
front of the rack is supplied to the inlets, and exhaust exits the rear of the rack. The
device must not interfere with the cooling of other systems in the rack. Fillers must be
used as appropriate in the rack to ensure there is no recirculation of heated exhaust
air back to the front of the rack. Care must also be taken around cables to ensure that
no leakage of air in situations where recirculation may result.
• For service personnel to remove and install hardware components, there must be
adequate space at the front and back of the switch. At least 24 in. (61 cm) is required
both in front of and behind the switch. NEBS GR-63 recommends that you allow at
least 30 in. (72.6 cm) in front of the rack and 24 in. (61.0 cm) behind the rack. See
Figure 33 on page 105.
Figure33: ClearanceRequirementsforAirflowandHardwareMaintenancefor an EX9208 Switch Chassis
RearFront17.4"
(44.2 cm)
24.5"(62.2 cm)
g004
259
Front-mounting flange
19.2"(48.7 cm)
24" (61 cm)clearance requiredfor maintenance 24" (61 cm)
clearance requiredfor maintenance
Cable management system
27.75"(70.75 cm)
105Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 5: Rack and Cabinet Requirements
RelatedDocumentation
• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 267
• Rack Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 101
• Cabinet Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 103
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch on page 53
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.106
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 6
Cable Requirements
• Cables Connecting the EX9200 Switch to Management Devices on page 107
• Understanding EX Series Switches Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and
Dispersion on page 108
Cables Connecting the EX9200 Switch toManagement Devices
Table 44 on page 107 lists the specifications for the cables that connect the Routing
Engine in an EX9200 switch to amanagement device.
Table 44: Cable Specifications for Switch-to-Management-DeviceConnections
SwitchReceptacle
MaximumLength
Cable/WireSuppliedCable Specification
Port on REModule
RJ-45female
6 ft(1.83 m)
One 6 ft (1.83 m)length withRJ-45/DB-9connectors
RS-232(EIA-232)serialcable
Console(CONSOLE) orauxiliary (AUX)port
RJ-45autosensing
328 ft(100m)
One 15 ft (4.57 m)length withRJ-45/RJ-45connectors
Category 5 cable orequivalent suitable for100Base-T operation
Ethernet (<...>)Management port(10/100)
—NoneNoWire with gaugebetween 28-AWG and14-AWG (0.08 and2.08 mm2)
Alarm relaycontacts
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary Device on
page 166
•
• ConnectinganEX9200Switch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 165
• Connecting the EX9200 Switch to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 167
107Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Understanding EX Series Switches Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, andDispersion
To determine the power budget and power margin needed for fiber-optic connections,
you need to understand how signal loss, attenuation, and dispersion affect transmission.
EX Series Switches use various types of network cable, including multimode and
single-mode fiber-optic cable.
• Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable on page 108
• Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable on page 108
Signal Loss in Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable
Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally
(bounce off the walls of the fiber). Interfaces with multimode optics typically use LEDs
as light sources. However, LEDs are not coherent light sources. They spray varying
wavelengths of light into themultimode fiber, which reflects the light at different angles.
Light rays travel in jagged lines through amultimode fiber, causing signal dispersion.
When light traveling in the fiber core radiates into the fiber cladding (layers of lower
refractive indexmaterial in close contact with a core material of higher refractive index),
higher-order mode loss (HOL) occurs. Together, these factors reduce the transmission
distance of multimode fiber compared to that of single-mode fiber.
Single-mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light reflect internally through one
layer only. Interfaceswith single-mode optics use lasers as light sources. Lasers generate
a singlewavelength of light, which travels in a straight line through the single-mode fiber.
Compared to multimode fiber, single-mode fiber has a higher bandwidth and can carry
signals for longer distances. It is consequently more expensive.
Exceeding themaximumtransmissiondistancescan result in significant signal loss,which
causesunreliable transmission.For informationabout themaximumtransmissiondistance
andsupportedwavelength range for the typesof single-modeandmultimode fiber-optic
cables that areusedondifferent EXSeries switches seePluggableTransceiversSupported
on EX Series Switches.
Attenuation and Dispersion in Fiber-Optic Cable
Anoptical data link functionscorrectlyprovided thatmodulated light reaching the receiver
has enough power to be demodulated correctly. Attenuation is the reduction in strength
of the light signal during transmission. Passivemedia components such as cables, cable
splices, and connectors cause attenuation. Although attenuation is significantly lower
for optical fiber than for other media, it still occurs in both multimode and single-mode
transmission. An efficient optical data link must transmit enough light to overcome
attenuation.
Dispersion is the spreading of the signal over time. The following two types of dispersion
can affect signal transmission through an optical data link:
• Chromatic dispersion, which is the spreading of the signal over time caused by the
different speeds of light rays.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.108
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Modal dispersion,which is the spreading of the signal over time causedby thedifferent
propagation modes in the fiber.
For multimode transmission, modal dispersion, rather than chromatic dispersion or
attenuation, usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length. For single-mode
transmission,modaldispersion is nota factor.However, at higherbit ratesandover longer
distances, chromatic dispersion limits the maximum link length.
An efficient optical data linkmust have enough light to exceed theminimum power that
the receiver requires to operate within its specifications. In addition, the total dispersion
mustbewithin the limits specified for the typeof link inTelcordiaTechnologiesdocument
GR-253-CORE (Section 4.3) and International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
document G.957.
When chromatic dispersion is at the maximum allowed, its effect can be considered as
a power penalty in the power budget. The optical power budget must allow for the sum
of component attenuation, power penalties (including those from dispersion), and a
safety margin for unexpected losses.
RelatedDocumentation
Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget on page 116•
• Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin on page 117
109Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 6: Cable Requirements
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.110
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 7
Planning Power Requirements
• AC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches on page 111
• DC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches on page 112
• Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components on page 113
• AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX9208 Switch on page 113
• Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget on page 116
• Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin on page 117
AC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches
Table 45 on page 111 lists the power supply specifications for an AC power supply used
in EX9208 switches.
Table 45: AC Power Supply Specifications for an EX9208 Switch
SpecificationsItem
Operating range:
• Low-voltage line: 100–120 VAC
• High-voltage line: 200–240 VAC
AC input voltage
50–60 HzAC input line frequency
• Low-voltage line: 16 A
• High-voltage line: 15.1 A
AC input current rating
• Low-voltage line: 1167W
• High-voltage line: 2050W
AC output power
Table 46 on page 111 lists the AC power system specification for an EX9208 switch.
Table 46: AC Power SystemSpecifications
High-LineLow-LineItem
2+23+1Redundancy
111Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Table 46: AC Power SystemSpecifications (continued)
High-LineLow-LineItem
2050W1167WOutput power (maximum) per power supply
4100W3501WOutput power (maximum) per system
RelatedDocumentation
AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47•
• AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 49
• AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX9208 Switch on page 113
DC Power Supply Specifications for EX9208 Switches
Table 47 on page 112 lists the DC power supply specifications for EX9208 switches.
Table 47: DC Power Supply Specifications for an EX9208 Switch
SpecificationsItem
Operating range:
• Minimum operating range: –40.5 VDC
• Nominal operating range: –48 VDC
• Operating voltage range: –40.5 VDC to –72 VDC
DC input voltage
70 A (DIP=1)60 A (DIP=0)Maximum Input Current
2600W2400WMaximum output power
54.2 A@ –48 VDC normaloperating voltage
50 A@–48 VDC normaloperating voltage
DC input current rating
Table 48 on page 112 lists the power system specifications for EX9208 switches.
Table 48: DC Power SystemSpecifications
SpecificationsItem
2+2Redundancy
70 A (DIP=1)60 A (DIP=0)Outputpower (maximum)per supply
2600W2400W
5200W4800WOutputpower(maximum)persystem
RelatedDocumentation
DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50•
• DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 52
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.112
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components
Table 49 on page 113 lists the power requirements for different hardware components
of EX9200 switches.
Table 49: EX9200 Switch Component Power Requirements
Reserved Power (Watts)Typical Power (Watts)Component
• EX9204 Switch: 410W
• EX9208 Switch: 560W
• EX9214 Switch: 1670W
• EX9204 Switch: 410W
• EX9208 Switch: 560W
• EX9214 Switch: 1290W
Base system
• EX9204 Switch: 690W
• EX9208 Switch: 800W
• EX9214 Switch: 1910W
• EX9204 Switch: 690W
• EX9208 Switch: 800W
• EX9214 Switch: 1530W
Redundant system
150W150WSwitch Fabric module (SFmodule)
90W90WRouting Engine module (REmodule)
610W530WEX9200-2C-8XS line card
520W408WEX9200-4QS line card
607W511 WEX9200-6QS line card
610W550WEX9200-32XS line card
239W206WEX9200-40T line card
239W219WEX9200-40F line card
239W219WEX9200-40F-M line card
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX9208 Switch
Each AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet located on the power supply that
requires a dedicated AC power feed. Most sites distribute power through amain conduit
that leads to frame-mounted power distribution panels, one of which can be located at
the topof the rack that houses the switch. AnACpower cord connects eachpower supply
to the power distribution panel.
113Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
You can order detachable AC power cords, each approximately 8 ft (2.44m) long that
supply AC power to the switch. The C19 appliance coupler at the female end of the cord
inserts into the AC appliance inlet coupler, type C20 (right angle) as described by
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug at the male
end of the power cord fits into the power source receptacle that is standard for your
geographical location.
Table 50 on page 114 provides specifications and Figure 34 on page 115 depicts the plug
on the AC power cord provided for each country or region.
Table 50: AC Power Cord Specifications for an EX9208 Switch
Plug TypeElectricalSpecificationModel NumberCountry
SAA/3/15240 VAC, 50 HzAC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-AUAustralia
CH2-16P220 VAC, 50 HzAC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-CHChina
CEE 7/7220 or 230 VAC,50 Hz AC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-EUEurope (except Denmark, Italy,Switzerland, and United Kingdom)
CEI23-16/VII
230 VAC, 50 HzAC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-ITItaly
JIS 8303125 VAC, 50 or60 Hz AC
CBL-PWR-RA-JP15Japan
NEMAL6-20P
220 VAC, 50 or60 Hz AC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-JP
NEMA5-15P125 VAC, 60 HzAC
CBL-PWR-RA-US15North America
NEMAL5-15P
125 VAC, 60 HzAC
CBL-PWR-RA-TWLK-US15
NEMA 6-20250 VAC, 60 HzAC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-US
NEMAL6-20P
250 VAC, 60 HzAC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-TWLK-US
BS89/13240 VAC, 50 HzAC
CBL-M-PWR-RA-UKUnited Kingdom
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.114
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 34: AC Plug Types
WARNING: The AC power cord for the switch is intended for use with theswitch only and not for any other use.
WARNING:
Translation fromJapanese:Theattachedpower cable is only for thisproduct.Do not use the cable for another product.
NOTE: In North America, AC power cordsmust not exceed 4.5m(approximately 14.75 ft) in length, to comply with National Electrical Code(NEC)Sections 400-8 (NFPA75, 5-2.2) and 210-52, andCanadian ElectricalCode (CEC) Section 4-010(3). You can order AC power cords that are incompliance.
115Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
WARNING: The switch is pluggable type A equipment installed in arestricted-access location. It has a separate protective earthing terminal(sized for UNC 1/4-20 ground lugs) provided on the chassis in addition to thegrounding pin of the power supply cord. This separate protective earthingterminal must be permanently connected to earth.
CAUTION: Power cordsmust not block access to switch components. Werecommend that you route all AC power cord cables through the power cordtray provided with the switch.
RelatedDocumentation
AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47•
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
• AC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 284
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 169
• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 159
Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget
Calculate the link's power budget when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances
to ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient power for correct operation. The
powerbudget is themaximumamountofpower the linkcan transmit.Whenyoucalculate
thepowerbudget, youuseaworst-caseanalysis toprovideamarginof error, even though
all the parts of an actual system do not operate at the worst-case levels.
To calculate the worst-case estimate for fiber-optic cable power budget (PB) for the
link:
1. Determinevalues for the link'sminimumtransmitterpower (PT)andminimumreceiver
sensitivity (PR). For example, here, (P
T) and (P
R) are measured in decibels, and
decibels are referred to onemilliwatt (dBm).
PT= –15 dBm
PR= –28 dBm
NOTE: See the specifications for your transmitter and receiver to find theminimum transmitter power andminimum receiver sensitivity.
2. Calculate the power budget (PB) by subtracting (P
R) from (P
T):
–15 dBm – (–28 dBm) = 13 dBm
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.116
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
RelatedDocumentation
Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin on page 117•
• Understanding EX Series Switches Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and
Dispersion on page 108
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Margin
Calculate the link's power margin when planning fiber-optic cable layout and distances
to ensure that fiber-optic connections have sufficient signal power to overcome system
losses and still satisfy the minimum input requirements of the receiver for the required
performance level. The power margin (PM) is the amount of power available after
attenuation or link loss (LL) has been subtracted from the power budget (PB).
When you calculate the powermargin, you use aworst-case analysis to provide amargin
of error, even though all the parts of an actual system do not operate at worst-case
levels. Apowermargin (PM) greater than zero indicates that thepowerbudget is sufficient
to operate the receiver and that it does not exceed themaximum receiver input power.
This means the link will work. A (PM) that is zero or negative indicates insufficient power
to operate the receiver. See the specification for your receiver to find the maximum
receiver input power.
Before you begin to calculate the power margin:
• Calculate the power budget. See “Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable
Power Budget” on page 116.
To calculate the worst-case estimate for the power margin (PM) for the link:
1. Determine the maximum value for link loss (LL) by adding estimated values for
applicable link-loss factors—for example, use the sample values for various factors
as provided in Table 51 on page 117 (here, the link is 2 km long andmultimode, and the
(PB) is 13 dBm):
Table 51: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss
Sample (LL) Calculation ValuesEstimated Link-Loss ValueLink-Loss Factor
• 0.5 dBm
• 0 dBm
• Multimode—0.5 dBm
• Single mode—None
Higher-order mode losses (HOL)
• 0 dBm
• 0 dBm
• Multimode—None, if product ofbandwidth and distance is less than500MHz/km
• Single mode—None
Modal and chromatic dispersion
This example assumes 5 connectors.Loss for 5 connectors:
(5) * (0.5 dBm) = 2.5 dBm
0.5 dBmConnector
117Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 7: Planning Power Requirements
Table 51: Estimated Values for Factors Causing Link Loss (continued)
Sample (LL) Calculation ValuesEstimated Link-Loss ValueLink-Loss Factor
Thisexampleassumes2splices. Loss fortwo splices:
(2) * (0.5 dBm) = 1 dBm
0.5 dBmSplice
This example assumes the link is 2 kmlong. Fiber attenuation for 2 km:
• (2 km) * (1.0 dBm/km) = 2 dBm
• (2 km) * (0.5 dBm/km) = 1 dBm
• Multimode—1 dBm/km
• Single mode—0.5 dBm/km
Fiber attenuation
1 dBm1 dBmClock Recovery Module (CRM)
NOTE: For information about the actual amount of signal loss caused byequipment and other factors, see your vendor documentation for thatequipment.
2. Calculate the (PM) by subtracting (LL) from (P
B):
PB– LL = P
M
(13 dBm) – (0.5 dBm [HOL]) – ((5) * (0.5 dBm)) – ((2) * (0.5 dBm)) – ((2 km) *
(1.0 dBm/km)) – (1 dB [CRM]) = PM
13 dBm – 0.5 dBm – 2.5 dBm – 1 dBm – 2 dBm – 1 dBm = PM
13 dBm – 0.5 dBm – 2.5 dBm – 1 dBm – 2 dBm – 1 dBm = PM
PM= 6 dBm
Thecalculatedpowermargin is greater than zero, indicating that the link has sufficient
power for transmission. Also, the power margin value does not exceed themaximum
receiver input power. Refer to the specification for your receiver to find the maximum
receiver input power.
RelatedDocumentation
Calculating the EX Series Switch Fiber-Optic Cable Power Budget on page 116•
• Understanding EX Series Switches Fiber-Optic Cable Signal Loss, Attenuation, and
Dispersion on page 108
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.118
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 3
Installing and Connecting the Switch andSwitch Components
• Installing the Switch on page 121
• Installing Switch Components on page 135
• Connecting the Switch on page 159
• Performing Initial Configuration on page 181
119Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.120
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 8
Installing the Switch
• Installing and Connecting an EX9208 Switch on page 121
• Unpacking the EX9200 Switch on page 122
• Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX9208 Switch on page 123
• Installing a Mounting Shelf in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9208 Switch on page 125
• Moving the Mounting Brackets for Center-Mounting an EX9200 Switch on page 128
• Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129
• Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a Mechanical
Lift on page 132
Installing and Connecting an EX9208 Switch
TheEX9208switchchassis isa rigid sheet-metal structure thathouses theotherhardware
components such as Switch Fabric modules (SFmodules), Routing Engine module (RE
module), line cards, power supplies, fan tray, and air filter. The switch is shipped in a
wooden crate. A wooden pallet forms the base of the crate.
To install and connect an EX9208 switch:
1. Follow instructions in “Unpacking the EX9200 Switch” on page 122.
2. Mount the switch by following instructions appropriate for your site:
• MountinganEX9200SwitchonaRackorCabinetUsingaMechanicalLiftonpage 129
• Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift
on page 132
3. Follow instructions in “Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch” on page 159.
4. Follow instructions for connecting power as appropriate for your site:
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 169
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 173
5. Perform initial configuration of the switch by following instructions in “Connecting
and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure)” on page 182
6. Set the switch’s management options by following the appropriate instructions:
121Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
• Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on
page 165
• Connecting an EX9200 Switch to aManagement Console or an Auxiliary Device on
page 166
RelatedDocumentation
Rack Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 101•
• Cabinet Requirements for an EX9200 Switch on page 103
• ClearanceRequirements forAirflowandHardwareMaintenance for anEX9208Switch
on page 104
• Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX9200 Switches on page 265
Unpacking the EX9200 Switch
The switch is shipped in a wooden crate. A wooden pallet forms the base of the crate.
The switch chassis is bolted to this pallet. Quick start installation instructions and a
cardboard accessory box are also included in the shipping crate.
NOTE: The switch is maximally protected inside the shipping box. Do notunpack it until you are ready to begin installation.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• Phillips (+) screwdrivers, number 1 and 2
• 1/2-in. or 13-mmopen-endor socketwrench to removebracket bolts from the shipping
pallet
• Cover panels to cover any slots not occupied by a component
To unpack the switch:
1. Move the shipping crate to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible,
where you have enough room to remove the components from the chassis. While the
chassis is bolted to the pallet, you can use a forklift or pallet jack to move it.
2. Position the shipping crate with the arrows pointing up.
3. Open all the latches on the shipping crate.
4. Remove the front door of the shipping crate cover and set it aside.
5. Slide the remainder of the shipping crate cover off the pallet.
6. Remove the foam covering the top of the switch.
7. Remove the accessory box and the Quick Start installation instructions.
8. Verify the parts received against the lists.
9. Remove the vapor corrosion inhibitor (VCI) packs attached to the pallet, being careful
not to break the VCI packs open.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.122
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
10. To remove the brackets holding the chassis on the pallet, use a 1/2-in. socket wrench
andanumber 2Phillips screwdriver to remove thebolts and screws fromthebrackets.
11. Store the brackets and bolts inside the accessory box.
12. Save the shipping crate cover, pallet, and packingmaterials in case you need tomove
or ship the switch at a later time.
Figure 35onpage 123 showsanEX9208 switch in the shipping crate. The contents are
the same for all EX9200 switches.
Figure 35: Contents of the Shipping Crate for EX9200 Switches
g022
007
Shipping cratecover
Chassis
Shipping cratebase
RelatedDocumentation
Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129•
• Mounting an EX9204 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a Mechanical Lift
• Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift on
page 132
Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX9208 Switch
The switch shipment includes a packing list. Check the parts you receive in the switch
shipping crate against the items on the packing list. The packing list specifies the part
number and provides description of each part in your order. The parts shipped depend
on the configuration you order. See “EX9208Switch Configurations” on page 10 formore
information.
If any part on the packing list is missing, contact your customer service representative or
contact Juniper customer care fromwithin the U.S. or Canada by telephone at
1–800–638–8296. For international-dial or direct-dial options in countries without
toll-free numbers, see http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html .
NOTE: All line cards ordered are shipped separately. Line cards are not listedon the switch’s packing list.
123Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
NOTE: The base configuration is available only with AC power supplies. Theredundant configuration ships with either AC or DC power supplies.
Table 52 on page 124 lists the parts and their quantities in the packing list for a base
configuration and a redundant configuration switch.
Table 52: Parts List for Different EX9208 Switch Configurations
Redundant ConfigurationQuantityBaseConfigurationQuantityComponent
11Chassis, including themidplane and front-mountingbrackets
21Routing Engine module (REmodule)
21Switch Fabric module (SFmodule)
4 AC (low-line or high-line) or4 DC
One of the following:
• 3 low-line (100–120 VAC)AC
• 2 high-line (200–240 VAC)AC
Power supplies
11Fan tray
11Air filter
• Line card cover panels: 6• Line card cover panels: 6
• SFmodule cover panel: 1
• Power supply cover panels:1 or 2
Cover panels for slots withoutinstalled components
Table53onpage 124 lists theparts contained in theaccessorybox. Thesameaccessories
ship with both configurations of the switch.
Table 53: Accessory Box Parts List
QuantityPart
22Screws to mount chassis and small shelf
8DC power terminal Lugs, 6WG
1RJ-45-to-DB-9 cable to connect the switch through theserial port
2Cable management brackets
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.124
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 53: Accessory Box Parts List (continued)
QuantityPart
2Terminal block plug, 3-pole, 5.08mm spacing, 12A, toconnect the alarms
1Label, accessories contents, EX9208
1Readme first document
1Affidavit for T1 connection
1Juniper Networks ProductWarranty
1End User License Agreement
1Document sleeve
23 in. x 5 in. pink bag
29 in. x 12 in. pink bag, ESD
1Accessory Box, 19 in. x 12 in. x 3 in.
1Ethernet cable, RJ-45/RJ-45, 4-pair stranded UTP,Category 5E, 15'
1ESD wrist strap with cable
RelatedDocumentation
Unpacking the EX9200 Switch on page 122•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
Installing aMounting Shelf in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9208 Switch
The switch can be installed in a four-post rack or cabinet or in an open-frame rack. Install
the mounting hardware on the rack before installing the switch.
We recommend that you install the mounting shelf, which is included in the shipping
container, before installing the switch because the weight of a fully loaded chassis can
be up to 163.6 lb (74.2 kg).
Table54onpage 126specifies theholes inwhich you insert cagenutsandscrews to install
the mounting hardware required (an X indicates amounting hole location). The hole
distances are relative to one of the standard U divisions on the rack. The bottom of all
mounting shelves is at 0.02 in. above a U division.
125Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Table 54: Four-Post Rack or Cabinet Mounting Hole Locations
Mounting ShelfDistance Above U DivisionHole
X1.14 U2.00 in. (5.1 cm)4
X0.86 U1.51 in. (3.8 cm)3
X0.50 U0.88 in. (2.2 cm)2
X0.14 U0.25 in. (0.6 cm)1
To install the mounting shelf on the front rails of a four-post rack or cabinet, or on the
rails of an open-frame rack:
1. If needed, install cage nuts in the holes specified in Table 54 on page 126.
2. On the back of each rack rail, partially insert a mounting screw into the lowest hole
specified in Table 54 on page 126.
3. Install the mounting shelf on the back of the rack rails. Rest the bottom slot of each
flange on amounting screw.
4. Partially insert the remaining screws into theopenholes in each flangeof themounting
shelf (see Figure 36 on page 127 and Figure 37 on page 128).
5. Tighten all the screws completely.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.126
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 36: Installing theMounting Shelf for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet
127Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Figure 37: Installing theMounting Shelf for an Open-Frame Rack
RelatedDocumentation
Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129•
• Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift on
page 132
Moving theMounting Brackets for Center-Mounting an EX9200 Switch
Two removable mounting brackets are attached to the mounting holes closest to the
front of the chassis. You canmove the pair of brackets to another position on the side of
the chassis for center-mounting the switch.
Tomove themounting brackets from the front of the chassis toward the center of the
chassis:
1. Remove the three screws at the top and center of the bracket.
2. Pull the top of the bracket slightly away from the chassis. The bottom of the bracket
contains a tab that inserts into a slot in the chassis.
3. Pull the bracket away from the chassis so that the tab is removed from the chassis
slot.
4. Insert the bracket tab into the slot in the bottom center of the chassis.
5. Align the bracket with the twomounting holes located toward the top center of the
chassis.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.128
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
There is nomounting hole in the center of the chassis that corresponds to the hole in
the center of the bracket.
6. Insert the two screws at the top of the bracket and tighten each partially.
Two screws are needed for mounting the bracket on the center of the chassis. You
do not need the third screw.
7. Tighten the two screws completely.
8. Repeat the procedure for the other bracket.
RelatedDocumentation
Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129•
• Mounting an EX9204 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a Mechanical Lift
• Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift on
page 132
• Installing a Mounting Shelf in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9204 Switch
• Installing a Mounting Shelf in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9208 Switch on page 125
• Installing a Mounting Shelf in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9214 Switch
Mounting an EX9200 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift
Becauseof thesizeandweightof theswitch,westrongly recommendusingamechanical
lift to install the switch.
CAUTION: Do not install line cards in the chassis until after youmount thechassis securely on a rack or cabinet.
CAUTION: Before front-mounting the switch on a rack or cabinet, have aqualified technicianverify that the rackorcabinet is strongenoughtosupporttheweight of the switch and is adequately supported at the installation site.
Before you install the switch:
• Prepare the site for installation as described inSite PreparationChecklist for an EX9204
Switch, “Site Preparation Checklist for an EX9208 Switch” on page 91, or Site
Preparation Checklist for an EX9214 Switch.
• Ensure the site has adequate clearance for both airflow and hardware maintenance
as described in Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for an
EX9204 Switch, “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for
an EX9208 Switch” on page 104, or Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware
Maintenance for an EX9214 Switch.
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
129Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
• Unpack the switch as described in “Unpacking the EX9200 Switch” on page 122.
• In a four-post rack or open-frame rack, install the mounting shelf. See Installing a
Mounting Shelf in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9204 Switch, “Installing a Mounting Shelf
in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9208 Switch” on page 125, or Installing a Mounting Shelf
in a Rack or Cabinet for an EX9214 Switch.
• Review chassis lifting guidelines described in “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX9200
Switches” on page 265.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install the switch:
• Amechanical lift
• 7/16-in. (11-mm) nut driver
• Phillips (+) screwdrivers, number 1 and 2
• ESD grounding wrist strap
CAUTION: If you are installingmore than one switch in a rack or cabinet,install the first switch at the bottom of the rack.
To install the switch using amechanical lift:
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. Ensure that the rack or cabinet is placed in its permanent location and is secured to
the building. Ensure that the installation site allows adequate clearance for both
airflow andmaintenance.
3. Load the switch onto the lift, making sure it rests securely on the lift platform.
4. Using the lift, position the switch in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front of
the mounting shelf installed in the rack.
5. Lift the chassis approximately 0.75 in. (1.9 cm) above the surface of the mounting
shelf and position it as close as possible to the shelf.
6. Carefully slide the switch onto the mounting shelf so that the bottom of the chassis
and themounting shelf overlap by approximately two inches.
Slide the switch onto themounting shelf until themounting brackets contact the rack
rails. The shelf ensures that the holes in the mounting brackets of the chassis align
with the holes in the rack rails.
7. Move the lift away from the rack.
8. Install amounting screw into each of the open front-mounting holes alignedwith the
rack, starting from the bottom.
9. Visually inspect the alignment of the switch. If the switch is installed properly in the
rack, all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting
screws on the opposite side and the switch is level.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.130
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 38 on page 131 shows installing an EX9208 switch in an open-frame rack. The
procedure is the same for all EX9200 switches.
Figure 38: Installing the Switch in an Open-Frame Rack
RelatedDocumentation
Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 171•
• Powering On a DC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 177
• Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 182
131Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift
To install the switch in the rack (see Figure 39 on page 133):
CAUTION: If you are installingmore than one switch in a rack, install thelowest one first. Installing a switch in an upper position in a rack or cabinetrequires a lift.
CAUTION: Before front mounting the switch in a rack, have a qualifiedtechnician verify that the rack is strong enough to support the weight of theswitch and is adequately supported at the installation site.
CAUTION: Lifting the chassis andmounting it in a rack requires two people.The empty chassis weighs approximately 65.5 lb (29.7 kg).
1. Prepare the site for installation as described in “Site Preparation Checklist for an
EX9208 Switch” on page 91.
2. Ensure the site has adequate clearance for both airflow and hardware maintenance
as described in “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance for
an EX9208 Switch” on page 104.
3. Unpack the switch as described in “Unpacking the EX9200 Switch” on page 122.
4. Remove all components except the midplane from the chassis. See:
• Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 202
• Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 193
• Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 195
• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch on page 197
5. Ensure that the rack is in its permanent location and is secured to the building. Ensure
that the installation site allowsadequate clearance for bothairflowandmaintenance.
6. Position the switch in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in front of themounting
shelf. Use a pallet jack if one is available.
7. With one person on each side, hold onto the bottom of the chassis and carefully lift
it onto the mounting shelf.
WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with yourlegs, not your back. Avoid twisting your body as you lift. Balance the loadevenly, and be sure that your footing is solid.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.132
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
8. Slide the switch onto themounting shelf until themounting brackets contact the rack
rails. The shelf ensures that the holes in the mounting brackets of the chassis align
with the holes in the rack rails.
9. Install a mounting screw into each of the openmounting holes aligned with the rack,
starting from the bottom.
10. Visually inspect the alignment of the switch. If the switch is installed properly in the
rack, all themountingscrewsononesideof the rackmustbealignedwith themounting
screws on the opposite side and the switch must be level.
Figure 39: Installing the Switch in an Open-Frame Rack
After you install the mounting screws and securely bolt the chassis to the rack, reinstall
the components in the chassis. See:
• Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 145
• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch on page 141
• Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 137
• Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 139
RelatedDocumentation
• Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 171
• Powering On a DC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 177
133Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 8: Installing the Switch
• Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 182
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.134
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 9
Installing Switch Components
• Installing and Removing EX9208 Switch Hardware Components on page 135
• Installing Cable Management Brackets on an EX9208 Switch on page 136
• Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 137
• Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 139
• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch on page 141
• Installing an RE Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 143
• Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 145
• Upgrading an EX9200-SF to an EX9200-SF2 on page 148
• Unpacking a Line Card Used in an EX9200 Switch on page 151
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 154
• Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to a Switch on page 156
Installing and Removing EX9208 Switch Hardware Components
The field-replaceable units (FRUs) in an EX9208 switch are:
• Routing Engine module (REmodule)
• Switch Fabric module (SFmodule)
• Power supplies (AC and DC)
• Fan tray
• Line cards
• SFP, SFP+, QSFP+, and CFP transceivers
The REmodule and SFmodule are hot-removable or hot-pluggable depending on the
configuration of the switch. See “EX9208 Switch Configurations” on page 10.
All the line cards are hot-removable and hot-insertable. However, we recommend that
you take them offline before removing them.
135Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
The AC and DC power supplies, fan tray, and the SFP, SFP+, and QSFP+ transceivers in
EX9200 switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs: You can remove and
replace themwithout powering off the switch or disrupting switch functions.
To install an REmodule in an EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Installing an RE
Module in an EX9200 Switch” on page 143. To remove an REmodule from an EX9208
switch, follow instructions in “Removing an RE Module from an EX9200 Switch” on
page 200.
To install an SFmodule in an EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Installing an SF
Module in an EX9200 Switch” on page 145. To remove an SFmodule from an EX9208
switch, follow instructions in “Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch” on
page 202.
To install a line card in an EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a Line Card in
an EX9200 Switch” on page 152. To remove a line card in an EX9208 switch, follow
instructions in “Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch” on page 204.
To install an AC power supply in an EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Installing an
AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch” on page 137. To remove a power supply from an
EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208
Switch” on page 193.
To install a DC power supply in an EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a DC
Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch” on page 139. To remove a DC power supply from an
EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208
Switch” on page 195.
To install a fan tray in an EX9208 switch, follow instructions in “Installing a Fan Tray in
an EX9200 Switch” on page 141. To remove a fan tray from an EX9208 switch, follow
instructions in “Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch” on page 197.
To install a transceiver in anEX9208switch, follow instructions in “InstallingaTransceiver
in an EX Series Switch” on page 154. To remove a transceiver from an EX9208 switch,
follow instructions in “Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch” on page 207.
RelatedDocumentation
Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
Installing Cable Management Brackets on an EX9208 Switch
Before you install cable management brackets on the switch:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that youhave the followingparts and tools available to install cablemanagement
brackets on an EX9208 switch chassis:
• ESD grounding strap
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.136
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1 and 2
The cable management brackets attach to both sides of the switch. To install the cable
management brackets (see Figure 40 on page 137):
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. Position the cable management brackets on the front sides of the chassis.
3. Insert the tabs into the slots.
4. Tighten the captive screws completely.
Figure40: InstallingtheCableManagementBrackets inanEX9208Switch
ESD
Slot
Screws
g022
012
Tab
RelatedDocumentation
Cable Management Brackets in an EX9208 Switch on page 23•
Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch
The AC power supply in an EX9208 switch is a hot-insertable and hot-removable
field-replaceable unit (FRU). Up to four ACpower supplies canbe installed in an EX9208
switch. All AC power supplies install in the rear of the chassis in the slots provided at the
bottom.
Before you install an AC power supply in the switch:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that youhave the followingparts and tools available to install anACpower supply
in an EX9208 switch chassis:
137Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1 and 2
NOTE: Each AC power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC powersource outlet.
To install an AC power supply in an EX9208 switch (see Figure 41 on page 139):
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. If the power supply slot has a cover panel on it, unscrew the screw on the side of the
cover panel in the counterclockwise direction using the screwdriver, and remove the
cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
3. Taking carenot to touchpower supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the power supply from its bag.
4. Flip the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the off (O)
position.
5. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the rear of the
switch. Slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply is fully
seated in the slot. Ensure the power supply faceplate is flushwith any adjacent power
supply faceplates or power supply cover panels.
6. Push the handle toward the faceplate of the power supply until it is flush against the
faceplate.
7. Push the captive screw into the power supply faceplate. Ensure that the screw is
seated inside the corresponding hole on the faceplate.
8. Tighten the captive screw by turning it clockwise using the screwdriver. When the
screw is completely tight, the latch locks into the switch chassis.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.138
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 41: Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch
g022
023
Loosen captive screws
RelatedDocumentation
Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 193•
• Power Requirements for EX9200 Switch Components on page 113
• Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27
• AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47
Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch
The DC power supply in an EX9208 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable unit (FRU). Up to fourDCpower supplies canbe installed in anEX9208
switch. All DC power supplies install in the rear of the chassis in the slots provided at the
bottom.
Before you install a DC power supply in the switch:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
• Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there
is no chance that the cable leads might become active during installation.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a DC power supply
in an EX9208 switch chassis:
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1 and 2
To install a DC power supply in an EX9208 switch (see Figure 42 on page 140):
139Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. If the power supply slot has a cover panel on it, unscrew the screw on the side of the
cover panel in the counterclockwise direction using the screwdriver, and remove the
cover panel. Save the cover panel for later use.
3. Taking carenot to touchpower supply components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the power supply from its bag.
4. Move the DC circuit breaker on the power supply faceplate to the off (O) position.
5. Using both hands, place the power supply in the power supply slot on the front of the
switch. Slide the power supply straight into the chassis until the power supply is fully
seated in the slot. Ensure the power supply faceplate is flushwith any adjacent power
supply faceplates or power supply cover panels.
6. Push the handle toward the faceplate of the power supply until it is flush against the
faceplate.
7. Push the captive screw into the power supply faceplate. Ensure that the screw is
seated inside the corresponding hole on the faceplate.
8. Tighten the captive screw by turning it clockwise using the screwdriver. When the
screw is completely tight, the latch locks into the switch chassis.
Toconnectpower toaDCpower supply, see “ConnectingDCPower toanEX9208Switch”
on page 173.
Figure 42: Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch
RelatedDocumentation
Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 195•
• DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.140
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch
The fan tray in anEX9200switch is ahot-insertableandhot-removable field-replaceable
unit (FRU); You can remove and replace it while the switch is running without turning off
power to the switch or disrupting switching functions.
Before you begin to install a fan tray:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdrivers, number 1 and 2
CAUTION: The fan tray can be removed and replaced while the switch isoperating. However, the fan traymust be replaced within 2minutes ofremoving the fan tray to prevent the chassis from overheating.
To install a fan tray in an EX9200 switch:
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. Grasp the fan tray handle, and insert it straight into the chassis. Note the correct
orientation by the This side up label on the top surface of the fan tray.
3. Tighten the captive screws using a screwdriver on the fan tray faceplate to secure it
in the chassis.
Figure 43 on page 142 shows installing a fan try in an EX9208 switch. The procedure and
orientationof the fan trayare thesameforEX9204.Theprocedure is thesameforEX9214
switch; however, the orientation of the fan try is different—it is installed horizontally into
the top and bottom of the chassis (see Figure 44 on page 143).
141Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Figure 43: Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9208 Switch
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.142
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 44: Installing the Upper Fan Tray in an EX9214 Switch
g022
047
RelatedDocumentation
Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch on page 197•
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9204 Switch
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch on page 53
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9214 Switch
• Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27
Installing an REModule in an EX9200 Switch
The Routing Engine module (REmodule) in an EX9200 switch is a hot-insertable and
hot-removable field-replaceable unit (FRU); You can remove and replace it while the
switch is runningwithout turningoff power to the switchordisrupting switching functions.
EachREmodule is installed horizontally in a Switch Fabricmodule (SFmodule) installed
in the switch.
CAUTION: Do not lift the REmodule by holding the ejector handles. Theejector handles cannot support the weight of themodule. Lifting the ejector
143Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
handles by the levers might bend the levers, and the bent ejector handleswill prevent the REmodule from being properly seated in the chassis.
Before you begin installing an REmodule in an EX9200 switch:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install an REmodule:
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdrivers, number 1 and 2
To install an REmodule in an EX9200 switch:
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your barewrist and connect the strap to one of the
ESD points on the chassis.
2. Taking care not to touch the leads, pins, or solder connections, pull the REmodule
out from the bag.
3. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the
ejector handles outward.
4. Place one hand underneath the REmodule to support it.
5. Carefully align the sides of the REmodule with the guides inside the RE slot on the
SF.
6. Slide the REmodule into the SFmodule until you feel resistance, and then press in
the faceplate of the REmodule until it engages the connectors.
7. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the REmodule.
8. Tighten the screws, one on each side of the REmodule using a screwdriver.
9. Connect the management device cables to the REmodule.
The REmodule might require several minutes to boot.
After the REmodule boots, verify that it is installed correctly by checking the RE0 and
RE1 LEDs on the craft interface. If the switch is operational and the Routing Engine is
functioning properly, theONLINE LED glows steady green. If the FAIL LED glows red
steadily instead, removeand install theREagain. If theFAILLEDstill glows redsteadily,
the RE is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support representative.
You can use show chassis routing-engine command to check the status of Routing
Engines.
Figure45onpage 145shows installinganREmodule inanEX9204switch. Theprocedure
is the same for all EX9200 switches.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.144
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 45: Installing an REModule in an EX9200 Switch
g022
0390
2
1 0
1
ESD
RoutingEngine
RelatedDocumentation
Removing an RE Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 200•
• Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
Installing an SFModule in an EX9200 Switch
The Switch Fabric module (SFmodule) in an EX9200 switch is a hot-insertable and
hot-removable field-replaceable unit (FRU); You can remove and replace it while the
switch is runningwithout turningoff power to the switchordisrupting switching functions.
NOTE: Do not lift the SFmodule by holding the ejector handles. The ejectorhandles cannot support the weight of themodule. Lifting themodule by theejectorhandlesmightbend theejectorhandles.Bentejectorhandlespreventthe SFmodule from being properly seated in the chassis.
Before you begin installing an SFmodule:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• ESD grounding strap
To install an SFmodule:
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to one of
the ESD points on the chassis.
2. If the slot has a cover panel on it, rotate the ejector handles simultaneously
counterclockwise to unseat the cover panel.
3. Grasp the ejector handles, and slide the cover panel out of the chassis. Save the cover
panel for later use.
145Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
4. Taking care not to touch the leads, pins, or solder connections, pull the SFmodule
out from the bag.
5. Rotate the ejector handles to a vertical position.
6. Align the sides of the SFmodule with the guides inside the chassis.
7. Ensuring that the module remains correctly aligned, slide the SFmodule into the
chassis until you feel resistance.
8. Rotate both the ejector handles simultaneously clockwise until the SFmodule is fully
seated. Place the ejector handles in the proper position, horizontally and toward the
center of the board.
9. Verify that the SFmodule is installed correctly and functioning normally by checking
the LEDs on the faceplate of the SFmodule.
• TheOK/FAIL LED glows steady green a fewminutes after the SFmodule is
successfully installed.
• If theOK/FAIL LED is red, remove and install the SFmodule again. If theOK/FAIL
LED is still red or is off, the SFmodule is not functioning properly. Contact your
customer support representative.
10. Check the status of the SF using the show chassis environment cb command:
user@switch> show chassis environment cbCB 0 status: State Online Master Temperature 29 degrees C / 84 degrees F Power 1 1.0 V 1002 mV 1.2 V 1218 mV 1.5 V 1472 mV 1.8 V 1830 mV 2.5 V 2526 mV 3.3 V 3338 mV 5.0 V 5059 mV 5.0 V RE 4969 mV 12.0 V 12239 mV 12.0 V RE 12123 mV Power 2 4.6 V bias MidPlane 4840 mV 11.3 V bias PEM 11176 mV 11.3 V bias FPD 11292 mV 11.3 V bias POE 0 11272 mV 11.3 V bias POE 1 11311 mV Bus Revision 64 FPGA Revision 13 PMBus Expected Measured Measured Calculated device voltage voltage current power XF ASIC A 1000 mV 997 mV 13625 mA 13584 mW XF ASIC B 1000 mV 1000 mV 12484 mA 12484 mWCB 1 status: State Online Standby Temperature 29 degrees C / 84 degrees F Power 1 1.0 V 1002 mV 1.2 V 1214 mV 1.5 V 1472 mV
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.146
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
1.8 V 1807 mV 2.5 V 2520 mV 3.3 V 3319 mV 5.0 V 5059 mV 5.0 V RE 4969 mV 12.0 V 12258 mV 12.0 V RE 12239 mV Power 2 4.6 V bias MidPlane 4840 mV 11.3 V bias PEM 11195 mV 11.3 V bias FPD 11234 mV 11.3 V bias POE 0 11176 mV 11.3 V bias POE 1 11214 mV Bus Revision 64 FPGA Revision 13 PMBus Expected Measured Measured Calculated device voltage voltage current power XF ASIC A 1000 mV 1002 mV 11281 mA 11303 mW XF ASIC B 1000 mV 997 mV 11015 mA 10981 mW
NOTE: The output is of an EX9208 switch. The output is similar for allEX9200 switches.
Figure46onpage 147 shows installinganSFmodule in anEX9208switch. Theprocedure
is the same for all EX9200 switches.
Figure 46: Installing an SFModule in an EX9200 Switch
ESD
g022
010
SF
RelatedDocumentation
Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 202•
• Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32
• Switch Fabric Module LEDs in an EX9200 Switch on page 35
• Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27
147Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Upgrading an EX9200-SF to an EX9200-SF2
For an EX9200 switch, if you want to upgrade the original SFmodule, EX9200-SF, with
the high-speed SFmodule, EX9200-SF2, follow these steps:
1. Preparing the EX9200 Switch for an EX9200-SF2 Upgrade on page 148
2. Powering Off the Switch on page 148
3. Removing a Routing Engine from an EX9200-SF Module on page 148
4. Replacing the EX9200-SF with the EX9200-SF2 on page 149
5. Installing a Routing Engine into an EX9200-SF2 on page 149
6. Powering On the Switch on page 149
7. Completing the EX9200-SF2 Upgrade on page 150
Preparing the EX9200 Switch for an EX9200-SF2 Upgrade
To prepare the switch for the upgrade:
1. Verify that the system runs Junos OS Release 14.1 or later by issuing the show versioncommand on the switch.
user@switch> show versionModel: ex9208 Junos Base OS Software Suite [14.1-yyyymmdd];...
NOTE: The EX9200-SF2 is supported only on Junos OS Release 14.1 orlater.
The latest softwareensuresahealthy system—that is, a systemthatcomprisesRouting
Engines, control boards, and FPCs—before the upgrade.
2. If the system isNOT running JunosOSRelease 14.1 or later, upgrade the software now.
For informationabouthowtoverifyandupgrade JunosOS, see the JunosOS Installation
and Upgrade Guide.
Powering Off the Switch
See “Powering Off an EX9200 Switch” on page 189
Removing a Routing Engine from an EX9200-SFModule
To remove a Routing Engine from the EX9200-SF:
1. Remove the cables connected to the Routing Engine.
2. Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
3. Attachanelectrostaticdischarge (ESD)groundingstrap toyourbarewrist, andconnect
the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.148
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
4. Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
5. Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the Routing Engine.
6. Grasp the Routing Engine by the ejector handles, and slide it about halfway out of the
chassis.
7. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
8. Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
Replacing the EX9200-SFwith the EX9200-SF2
To replace the existing EX9200-SF with the EX9200-SF2:
1. Attachanelectrostaticdischarge (ESD)groundingstrap toyourbarewrist andconnect
the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
2. Remove and replace the offline EX9200-SF with the EX9200-SF2.
Installing a Routing Engine into an EX9200-SF2
To install a Routing Engine into an EX9200-SF2:
1. Attachanelectrostaticdischarge (ESD)groundingstrap toyourbarewrist, andconnect
the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis.
2. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the
ejector handles outward.
3. Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it.
4. Carefully align the sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the opening on
the SCBE2.
5. Slide theRoutingEngine into theEX9200-SF2until you feel resistance, and thenpress
the faceplate of the Routing Engine until it engages the connectors.
6. Press both of the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine.
7. Tighten the captive screws on the top and bottom of the Routing Engine.
8. Connect the management device cables to the Routing Engine.
Powering On the Switch
See “Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch” on page 171 or “Powering On a
DC-Powered EX9200 Switch” on page 177.
149Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Completing the EX9200-SF2 Upgrade
To complete the upgrade procedure:
1. Verify that the installation is successful and the EX9200-SF2 is online by issuing the
show chassis environment cb command:
user@switch> show chassis environment cb 0CB 0 statusState OnlineTemperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F...
user@switch> show chassis environment cb 1CB 1 statusState OnlineTemperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F...
Other details, suchas, temperature, power, etc are alsodisplayedalongwith the state.
2. Verify that the fabric planes come online correctly by issuing the show chassis fabric
summary command:
user@switch> show chassis fabric summaryPlane State Uptime 0 Online 2 days, 19 hours, 10 minutes, 9 seconds 1 Online 2 days, 19 hours, 10 minutes, 9 seconds...
3. Verify that the backup Routing Engine is back online by issuing the show chassis
routing-engine 1 command:
user@switch> show chassis routing-engine 1Routing Engine Status:Slot 1:Current State Backup...
4. Verify that the EX9200-SF2s appear in output from the show chassis hardware
command:
user@switch> show chassis hardwareHardware inventory:Item Version Part number Serial number DescriptionChassis JN1221A03RFC EX9204Midplane REV 01 750-053633 ACRA1451 EX9204-BPFPM Board REV 04 760-021392 ABCB4822 Front Panel DisplayPEM 0 Rev 10 740-029970 QCS1251U020 PS 1.4-2.52kW; 90-264V AC inPEM 1 Rev 10 740-029970 QCS1251U028 PS 1.4-2.52kW; 90-264V AC inRouting Engine 0 REV 02 740-049603 9009153805 RE-S-EX9200-1800X4Routing Engine 1 REV 02 740-049603 9009153993 RE-S-EX9200-1800X4CB 0 REV 08 750-048307 CABC6474 EX9200-SF2CB 1 REV 10 750-048307 CABH8948 EX9200-SF2...
RelatedDocumentation
Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 202•
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.150
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 145
Unpacking a Line Card Used in an EX9200 Switch
The line cards for EX9200 switches are rigid sheet-metal structures that house the line
card components including network ports. The line cards are shipped in a cardboard
carton, secured with foam packing material.
CAUTION: The linecardsaremaximallyprotected inside theshippingcarton.Do not unpack the line cards until you are ready to install them in the switchchassis.
Before you unpack a line card:
• Ensure that youhave taken thenecessaryprecautions topreventelectrostaticdischarge
(ESD) damage (see “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280).
• Ensure that you knowhow to handle and store the line card (see “Handling andStoring
Line Cards in EX9200 Switches” on page 218).
To unpack a line card (see Figure 47 on page 151):
1. Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible.
2. Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up.
3. Open the top flaps on the shipping carton.
4. Pull out the packing material, which holds the line card in place.
5. Remove the line card from the antistatic bag.
6. Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you need to move or ship the
line card later.
Figure 47: Unpacking a Line Card Used in an EX9200 Switch
RelatedDocumentation
Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152•
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
151Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch
EX9200 switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) line cards that can be installed in
the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are hot-insertable
and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering off the switch
ordisrupting switch functions.However,we recommend that you take themofflinebefore
removing them.
Before you begin installing a line card in the switch:
• Ensure that youhave taken thenecessaryprecautions topreventelectrostaticdischarge
(ESD) damage (see “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280).
• If there are any transceivers installed in the line card, remove them before you install
the line card. For instructions on removing transceivers, see “Removing a Transceiver
from an EX Series Switch” on page 207.
• Ensure that you knowhow to handle and store the line card (see “Handling andStoring
Line Cards in EX9200 Switches” on page 218).
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to install a line card in the
switch:
• ESD grounding strap
To install a line card in the switch:
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the switch chassis.
2. If the slot has a cover panel on it, rotate the ejector handles simultaneously
counterclockwise to unseat the cover panel.
3. Grasp the ejector handles, and slide the cover panel out of the chassis. Save the cover
panel for later use.
4. Taking care not to touch line card components, pins, leads, or solder connections,
remove the line card from its bag.
CAUTION: Do not lift the line card by holding the ejector handles on thefaceplate or the edge connectors. The ejector handles cannot support theweight of the line card. Lifting the line card by the ejector handlesmightbend them. Bent ejector handles prevent line cards from being properlyseated in the chassis.
5. Ensure that the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, flip the
ejector handles outward.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.152
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
6. Place one hand around the faceplate of the line card and the other hand under the
line card to support it.
CAUTION: The weight of line cards in EX9200 switches is in the range14–19.4 lb (6.6–8.8 kg). Be prepared to support the full weight as youslide the line card into the chassis.
Before you slide the line card into the slot on the switch chassis, ensurethe line card is aligned correctly. Misalignmentmight cause the pins tobend, making the line card unusable.
7. Lift the line card, and position it in the chassis with the faceplate facing you and the
sides of the line card alignedwith the guides in the line card slot on the switch chassis.
8. Make sure the handles stay in the open position and gently slide the line card fully into
the slot using both hands.
9. Rotate both of the ejector handles inward to seat the line card.
Figure 48 on page 153 shows installing a line card in an EX9204 switch. The procedure
and orientation of the line card are the same for EX9208. The procedure is the same for
EX9214switch; however, theorientationof the line card isdifferent—it is installedvertically
in the chassis.
Figure 48: Installing a Line Card
0
2
1 0
1
ESD
g022
034
Line card
Ejectors
You can verify that the line card is functioning correctly by issuing the show chassis fpc
and show chassis fpc pic-status commands.
NOTE: If you have a Juniper J-Care service contract, register any addition,change, or upgrade of hardware components athttps://www.juniper.net/customers/csc/management/updateinstallbase.jsp .
Failure to do so can result in significant delays if you need replacement parts.This note applies if you change the type of power supply from AC to DC orDC to AC or add a new type of line card. It does not apply if you replace thesecomponents with the same type of component.
153Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
RelatedDocumentation
Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch on page 204•
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch
The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace themwithout powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.
NOTE: After you insert a transceiver or after you change themedia-typeconfiguration, wait for 6 seconds for the interface to display operationalcommands.
NOTE: We recommend that you use only optical transceivers and opticalconnectors purchased from Juniper Networks with your Juniper Networksdevice.
CAUTION: If you are having a problem running a Juniper Networks devicethat is using a third-party optic or cable, the Juniper Networks TechnicalAssistance Center (JTAC) can help you diagnose the source of the problem.Your JTAC engineer might recommend that you check the third-party opticor cable and potentially replace it with an equivalent Juniper Networks opticor cable that is qualified for the device.
NOTE: OnanEX3200switch, if you install a transceiver ina 1-GigabitEthernetuplink module port, a corresponding network port from the last four built-inports is disabled. For example, if you install a transceiver in theuplinkmoduleport 3 (ge-0/1/2), then the built-in port 23 (ge-0/0/22) is disabled. The
disabled port is not listed in the output of show interface commands.
Before you begin installing a transceiver in an EX Series switch, ensure that you have
taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety
Guidelines andWarnings for Switches” on page 257).
Ensure that you have a rubber safety cap available to cover the transceiver.
Figure 49 on page 156 shows how to install a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the
same for all types of transceivers.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.154
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
To install a transceiver in an EX Series switch:
CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to thetransceiver, do not touch the connector pins at the end of the transceiver.
1. Remove the transceiver from its bag.
2. Check to see whether the transceiver is covered with a rubber safety cap. If it is not,
cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.
WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered exceptwheninserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port cleanand prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
3. If the port in which you want to install the transceiver is covered with a dust cover,
remove the dust cover and save it in case you need to cover the port later. If you are
hot-swappinga transceiver,wait for at least 10 secondsafter removing the transceiver
from the port before installing a new transceiver.
4. Using both hands, carefully place the transceiver in the empty port. The connectors
must face the switch chassis.
CAUTION: Before you slide the transceiver into the port, ensure that thetransceiver is aligned correctly. Misalignmentmight cause the pins tobend, making the transceiver unusable.
5. Slide the transceiver in gently until it is fully seated. If you are installing a CFP
transceiver, tighten the captive screws on the transceiver by using your fingers.
6. Remove the rubber safety cap when you are ready to connect the cable to the
transceiver.
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into theends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cablesconnected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
155Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Figure 49: Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch
1—Ejector lever
RelatedDocumentation
Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 207•
• Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to a Switch on page 156
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to a Switch
EXSeriesandOCX1100switches support optical transceivers,whichare field-replaceable
units (FRUs). You can connect fiber-optic cables to these transceivers.
Before you begin connecting a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a
switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers
(see “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches” on page 257).
To connect a fiber-optic cable to an optical transceiver installed in a switch:
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the endsof fiber-opticcables.Fiber-optic transceiversandfiber-opticcablesconnectedto transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
1. If the fiber-optic cable connector is coveredwith a rubber safety cap, remove the cap.
Save the cap.
2. Remove the rubber safety cap from the optical transceiver. Save the cap.
3. Insert the cable connector into the optical transceiver (see Figure 50 on page 157).
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.156
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 50: Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to an Optical TransceiverInstalled in a Switch
4. Secure thecables so that theyarenot supporting their ownweight. Placeexcess cable
outof theway inaneatly coiled loop.Placing fastenersona loophelps cablesmaintain
their shape.
CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bendradius.Anarcsmaller thana few inches indiametercandamagethecablesand cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
Do not let fiber-optic cables hang free from the connector. Do not allowfastened loops of cables to dangle, which stresses the cables at thefastening point.
RelatedDocumentation
• Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from a Switch on page 206
• Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 154
• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in Switches on page 223
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
• Installing a Transceiver in an OCX1100 Switch
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on OCX1100 Switches
157Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 9: Installing Switch Components
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.158
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 10
Connecting the Switch
• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 159
• ConnectinganEX9200Switch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 165
• Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary
Device on page 166
• Connecting the EX9200 Switch to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 167
• Connecting theAlarmRelayWires to theCraft Interface inanEX9200Switchonpage 168
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 169
• Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 171
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 173
• Powering On a DC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 177
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch
To ensure proper operation and to meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
requirements, youmust connect an EX Series switch to earth ground before you connect
power to the switch. Youmust use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis
to connect the switch to earth ground (see Figure 52 on page 164).
WARNING: The switch is installed in a restricted-access location. It has aseparateprotectiveearthingterminalonthechassis thatmustbepermanentlyconnected to earth ground to adequately ground the chassis and protect theoperator from electrical hazards.
CAUTION: Beforeswitch installationbegins, ensure thata licensedelectricianhas attached an appropriate grounding lug to the grounding cable that yousupply. Using a grounding cablewith an incorrectly attached lug candamagethe switch.
159Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
This topic describes:
• Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth
Ground on page 160
• Special Instructions toFollowBeforeConnectingEarthGround toaSwitchonpage 163
• Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch on page 164
Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground
Table 55 on page 160 lists the earthing terminal location, grounding cable requirements,
grounding lug specifications, screws and washers required, and the screwdriver needed
for connecting a switch to earth ground. Before you begin connecting a switch to earth
ground, ensure you have the parts and tools required for your switch.
Table 55: Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to Earth Ground
AdditionalInformationScrewdriver
Screws andWashers
Grounding LugSpecifications
Grounding CableRequirements
EarthingTerminalLocationSwitch
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two 10-32x .25 in. screwswith #10split-lockwasher—not provided
• Two #10 flatwashers—notprovided
PanduitLCC10-14BWL orequivalent—not provided
14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Rear panelof chassis
EX2200
See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnecting EarthGround to a Switch”on page 163.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two 10-32x .25 in. screwswith #10split-lockwasher—not provided
• Two #10 flatwashers—not provided
PanduitLCC10-14BWL orequivalent—not provided
14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Rear panelof chassis
EX3200
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two 10-32x .25 in. screwswith #10split-lockwasher—not provided
• Two #10 flatwashers—not provided
PanduitLCC10-14BWL orequivalent—not provided
14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Rear panelof chassis
EX3300
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.160
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Table 55: Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to EarthGround (continued)
AdditionalInformationScrewdriver
Screws andWashers
Grounding LugSpecifications
Grounding CableRequirements
EarthingTerminalLocationSwitch
See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnecting EarthGround to a Switch”on page 163.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two 10-32x .25 in. screwswith #10split-lockwasher—not provided
• Two #10 flatwashers—not provided
PanduitLCC10-14BWL orequivalent—not provided
14WG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Left side ofchassis
EX4200
See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnecting EarthGround to a Switch”on page 163.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two 10-32x .25 in. screwswith #10split-lockwasher—not provided
• Two #10 flatwashers—not provided
PanduitLCC10-14BWL orequivalent—not provided
14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Left side ofchassis
EX4300
See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnecting EarthGround to a Switch”on page 163.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two 10-32x .25 in. screwswith #10split-lockwasher—not provided
• Two #10 flatwashers—not provided
PanduitLCC10-14BWL orequivalent—not provided
14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Left side ofchassis
EX4500
See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnecting EarthGround to a Switch”on page 163.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two 10-32x .25 in. screwswith #10split-lockwasher—not provided
• Two #10 flatwashers—not provided
PanduitLCC10-14BWL orequivalent—not provided
14 AWG (2mm²),minimum90°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Left side ofchassis
EX4550
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two¼-20x 0.5 in. screwswith #¼”split-washer—provided
• Two #¼” flatwashers—provided
PanduitLCD2-14A-Q orequivalent—provided
Thegroundingcablemust be the samegage as the powerfeed cables and aspermitted by thelocal code.
Rear panelof chassis(on lowerleft side)
EX6210
161Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
Table 55: Parts and Tools Required for Connecting an EX Series Switch to EarthGround (continued)
AdditionalInformationScrewdriver
Screws andWashers
Grounding LugSpecifications
Grounding CableRequirements
EarthingTerminalLocationSwitch
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two¼-20x 0.5 in. screwswith #¼”split-washer—provided
• Two #¼” flatwashers—provided
PanduitLCD2-14A-Q orequivalent—provided
6 AWG (13.3 mm²),minimum60°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Left side ofchassis
EX8208
See “SpecialInstructions toFollow BeforeConnecting EarthGround to a Switch”on page 163.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two¼-20 x0.5 in. screwswith #¼”split-washer—provided
• Two #¼” flatwashers—provided
PanduitLCD2-14A-Q orequivalent—provided
2 AWG(33.6 mm²),minimum60°Cwire,or as permitted bythe local code
Twoearthingterminals:
• Left sideofchassis
• Rearpanel ofchassis
EX8216
See “GroundingCable and LugSpecifications forEX9200 Switches”on page 85.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two¼-20x 0.5 in. screwswith #¼”split-washer—provided
• Two #¼” flatwashers—provided
Thomas&BettsLCN6-14 orequivalent—provided
One 6 AWG (13.3mm²), minimum60°C wire, or onethat complies withthe local code
Rear panelof chassis
EX9204
See “GroundingCable and LugSpecifications forEX9200 Switches”on page 85.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two¼-20x 0.5 in. screwswith #¼”split-washer—provided
• Two #¼” flatwashers—provided
Thomas&BettsLCN6-14 orequivalent—provided
One 6 AWG (13.3mm²), minimum60°C wire, or onethat complies withthe local code
Rear panelof chassis
EX9208
See “GroundingCable and LugSpecifications forEX9200 Switches”on page 85.
Phillips (+)number 2
• Two¼-20x 0.5 in. screwswith #¼”split-washer—provided
• Two #¼” flatwashers—provided
Thomas&BettsLCN6-14 orequivalent—provided
One 6 AWG (13.3mm²), minimum60°C wire, or onethat complies withthe local code
Rear panelof chassis
EX9214
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.162
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a Switch
Table 56 on page 163 lists the special instructions that youmight need to follow before
connecting earth ground to a switch.
Table 56: Special Instructions to Follow Before Connecting Earth Ground to a Switch
Special InstructionsSwitch
NOTE: Someearly variants of EX3200 switches forwhich the Juniper Networksmodel number on the labelnext to theprotective earthing terminal is from750-021xxx through750-030xxx require 10-24x.25 in. screws.
EX3200
NOTE: Someearly variants of EX4200 switches forwhich the JuniperNetworksmodel number on the labelnext to theprotective earthing terminal is from750-021xxx through750-030xxx require 10-24x.25 in. screws.
NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on an EX4200 switchmounted on four posts of a rack is accessiblethrough the slot on the left rear bracket only if the rack is 27.5 in. through 30.5 in. deep for a switchmountedflushwith the rack front and 29.5 in. through 32.5 in. deep for a switchmounted 2 in. recessed from the rackfront. See Figure 51 on page 163.
Figure 51: Connecting the Grounding Lug to a SwitchMounted on Four Postsof a Rack
g004
479
3—1— Grounding lugProtective earthing terminal
4—2— Rear mounting-bladeSide mounting-rail
NOTE: The brackets must be attached to the chassis before the grounding lug is attached. (The bracketsare shown pulled away from the chassis so that the protective earthing terminal is seen.)
EX4200
NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on anEX4300 switchmounted on four posts of a rack is accessiblethrough the slot on the left rear bracket only if the rack is 27.5 in. through 30.5 in. deep for a switchmountedflushwith the rack front and 29.5 in. through 32.5 in. deep for a switchmounted 2 in. recessed from the rackfront.
EX4300
163Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
Table56:Special Instructions toFollowBeforeConnectingEarthGroundtoaSwitch(continued)
Special InstructionsSwitch
NOTE: If you plan to mount your switch on four posts of a rack or cabinet, mount your switch in the rackor cabinet before attaching the grounding lug to the switch. SeeMounting an EX4500 Switch on Four Postsin a Rack or Cabinet.
NOTE: Theprotective earthing terminal on anEX4500 switchmountedon four posts of a rack is accessiblethrough the slot on the left rear bracket only if the rack is 27.5 in. through 30.5 in. deep for a switchmountedflushwith the rack front and 29.5 in. through 32.5 in. deep for a switchmounted 2 in. recessed from the rackfront.
EX4500
NOTE: The protective earthing terminal on an EX4550 switchmounted on four posts of a rack is accessiblethrough the slot on the left rear bracket only if the rack is 27.5 in. through 30.5 in. deep for a switchmountedflushwith the rack front and 29.5 in. through 32.5 in. deep for a switchmounted 2 in. recessed from the rackfront.
EX4550
NOTE: Only one of the two protective earthing terminals needs to be permanently connected to earthground.
EX8216
Connecting Earth Ground to an EX Series Switch
To connect earth ground to a switch:
1. Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, such as the rack in
which the switch is mounted.
2. Place the grounding lug attached to the grounding cable over the protective earthing
terminal. See Figure 52 on page 164.
Figure 52: Connecting a Grounding Cable to an EX Series Switch
3. Secure the grounding lug to the protective earthing terminal with the washers and
screws.
4. Dress the grounding cable and ensure that it does not touch or block access to other
switch components.
WARNING: Ensure that the cable does not drapewhere people could tripover it.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.164
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch•
• Connecting DC Power to an EX2200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX3300 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX3300 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4300 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4300 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4500 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4550 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4550 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX6200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX6200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 169
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 173
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9214 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9214 Switch
• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Network for Out-of-BandManagement
You canmonitor andmanage an EX9200 switch by using a dedicatedmanagement
channel. Each switch has an Ethernet management port labeled <...>with an RJ-45
connector for out-of-bandmanagement.Use theEthernetmanagementport to connect
the EX9200 switch to the management device.
165Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. One such
cable is provided with the switch. Figure 53 on page 166 shows the RJ-45 connector of
the Ethernet cable supplied with the switch.
Figure 53: Ethernet Cable Connector
To connect a switch to a network for out-of-bandmanagement:
1. Turn off the power to the management device.
2. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the management port (labeled <...>) on
the Routing Engine module (REmodule) installed in the switch.
For the location of the Ethernet management port, see Figure 54 on page 166.
3. Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the management device.
Figure 54: Ethernet Management Port on the REModule in EX9200Switches
g022
003USB
portResetbutton
OnlineLED
MasterLED
OK/FailLED
StorageLED
Extractorclip
Extractorclip
Consoleport
Auxiliaryport
Ethernetport
SSDslot 2
SSDslot 1
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary Device on
page 166
•
• Ethernet Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200 Switch on page 60
• Cables Connecting the EX9200 Switch to Management Devices on page 107
Connecting an EX9200 Switch to aManagement Console or an Auxiliary Device
To use a system console to configure andmanage the Routing Engine, connect it to the
appropriate Console (CONSOLE) port on the Routing Engine module (REmodule). To
use a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device, connect it to the auxiliary (AUX) port on
theRE.Bothports acceptacablewithanRJ-45connector.Oneserial cablewithanRJ-45
connector and a DB-9 connector is provided with the switch. To connect a device to the
CONSOLE port and another device to theAUX port, youmust supply an additional cable.
Ensure that you have an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector available. An RJ-45
cable and an RJ-45 to DB-9 serial port adapter are supplied with the device.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.166
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 55 onpage 167 shows theRJ-45 connector of the Ethernet cable suppliedwith the
switch.
Figure 55: Ethernet Cable Connector
NOTE: If your laptopor PCdoes not have aDB-9male connector pin and youwant to connect your laptop or PC directly to the device, use a combinationof the RJ-45 to DB-9 female adapter supplied with the device and a USB toDB-9male adapter. Youmust provide the USB to DB-9male adapter.
To connect the device to amanagement console or auxiliary device:
1. Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.
2. Plug the RJ-45 end of the serial cable into the AUX port or CONSOLE port on the RE
module. Figure 56 on page 167 shows location of AUX and CONSOLE ports on RE
module.
3. Plug the female DB-9 end into the serial port of the switch.
Figure 56: Console and Auxiliary Ports on the REModule in EX9200Switches
g022
003USB
portResetbutton
OnlineLED
MasterLED
OK/FailLED
StorageLED
Extractorclip
Extractorclip
Consoleport
Auxiliaryport
Ethernetport
SSDslot 2
SSDslot 1
RelatedDocumentation
ConnectinganEX9200Switch toaNetwork forOut-of-BandManagementonpage 165•
• Console Port and AUX Port Connector Pinout Information for an EX9200 Switch on
page 58
• Cables Connecting the EX9200 Switch to Management Devices on page 107
Connecting the EX9200 Switch to an External Alarm-Reporting Device
To connect the switch to external alarm-reporting devices, attach wires to theMAJOR
ALARMandMINORALARM relaycontactson thecraft interface.SeeFigure57onpage 168.
A system condition that triggers themajor orminor alarm LED on the craft interface also
activates the corresponding alarm relay contact.
167Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied with the switch.
They accept wire of any gauge between 28 AWG (0.08mm2) and 14 AWG (2.08mm
2),
which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire appropriate for the external device you are
connecting.
To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact (see Figure 57 on page 168):
1. Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 28 AWG (0.08mm2) and
14 AWG (2.08mm2).
2. While the terminal block is not plugged into the relay contact, use a 2.5mm flat-blade
screwdriver to loosen the small screws on its side. With the small screws on its side
facing left, insert wires into the slots in the front of the block based on the wiring for
the external device. Tighten the screws to secure the wire.
3. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact, andusea2.5-mmflat-blade screwdriver
to tighten the screws on the face of the block.
4. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.
To attach a reporting device for the other kind of alarm, repeat the procedure.
Figure 57: Alarm Relay Contacts
g022
029
Craft Interface panel
Alarmrelay
contacts
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting the Alarm RelayWires to the Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch on
page 168
•
• Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch on page 17
Connecting the Alarm RelayWires to the Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch
Before you connect the alarm relay wires between a switch and an alarm-reporting
device:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• ESD grounding strap
• 2.5 mm flat-blade screwdriver
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.168
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
To connect the alarm relay wires between a switch and an alarm-reporting device (see
Figure 58 on page 169):
1. Prepare the required length of replacement wire with gauge between 28 AWG
(0.08mm2) and 14 AWG (2.08mm
2).
2. Insert the replacementwires into theslots in the frontof theblock.Use thescrewdriver
to tighten the screws and secure the wire.
3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your barewrist, and connect the strap to one of the
ESD points on the chassis.
4. Plug the terminal block into the relay contact, and use the screwdriver to tighten the
screws on the face of the block.
5. Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.
Figure 58: Alarm Relay Contacts
g022
029
Craft Interface panel
Alarmrelay
contacts
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting the EX9200 Switch to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 167•
• Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch on page 17
Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch
EX9208 switches can be configured with up to four AC power supplies.
CAUTION: Mixing AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis is notsupported.
NOTE: Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC powersource outlet.
Before you begin to connect power to the switch:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.
169Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
CAUTION: Tomeet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI)requirements and to ensure proper operation, EX9208 switchesmust beadequately grounded before they are connected to power.
For installations that requireaseparategroundingconductor to thechassis,use the protective earthing terminal on the EX9208 switch chassis toconnect to the earth ground. For instructions on connecting an EX9208switch to ground using a separate grounding conductor, see “ConnectingEarth Ground to an EX Series Switch” on page 159.
An EX9208 switch gets additional grounding when you plug the powersupply in theswitch intoagroundedACpoweroutletbyusing theACpowercord appropriate for your geographical location. See “AC Power CordSpecifications for an EX9208 Switch” on page 113.
• Install power supplies in the switch. See “Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208
Switch” on page 137.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to connect power to the
switch:
• ESD grounding strap (provided)
• Power cords appropriate for your geographical location (not provided)
WARNING: Ensure that the power cords do not block access to switchcomponents or drape where people can trip on them.
To connect AC power to an EX9208 switch:
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. Ensure that the power supply is fully inserted and latched securely in the chassis. See
“Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch” on page 137.
3. If needed, move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply
faceplate, to the off (O) position.
4. Insert the coupler end of the power cord into the AC appliance inlet on the AC power
supply faceplate.
5. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the off (O) position.
6. Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source outlet.
7. If the AC power source outlet has a power switch, set it to the on (|) position.
8. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the on(
| ) position and observe the status LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.170
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, theACOKandDCOK LEDs glow
steady green, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 9 for the remaining power supplies.
Figure 59: Connecting the Power Supply Cord to an EX9208 Switch
RelatedDocumentation
Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 171•
• AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47
• AC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 49
Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch
Before you power on the switch, ensure that:
• You have installed all required switch components.
• You have installed the required number of power supplies to support redundant
operation for the switch configuration.
• You understand how to protect the switch fromelectrostatic discharge (ESD) damage
. See “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• An ESD grounding strap.
• An external management device such as a PC.
• A cable to connect the external management device to the CONSOLE port or the
Ethernet management <...> port on themaster Routing Engine module (REmodule).
171Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
For connecting amanagement device to the console port, see “Connecting anEX9200
Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary Device” on page 166. For connecting
amanagement device to the Ethernetmanagement port, see “Connecting an EX9200
Switch to a Network for Out-of-Band Management” on page 165.
To power on the switch:
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. Connect the external management device to the Ethernet management (<...>) port
on themaster REmodule.
3. Turn on the power to the external management device.
4. Ensure that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and that each of their
handles is flush against the faceplate.
5. Ensure that the source power cord is inserted securely into the appliance inlet for each
AC power supply.
6. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers for the power supplies. Follow
the ESD and safety instructions for your site.
7. Flip theAC input switch on thepower supply to theOn (|) position.Observe thepower
supply faceplate LEDs. If the power supply is installed correctly and functioning
normally, the ACOK and DCOK LEDs glow steady green. The PS FAIL LED does not
glow.
8. Repeat Step 7 for the remaining power supplies installed in the switch.
If any of the status LEDs indicates that the power supply is not functioning normally,
repeat the installationandcablingprocedures. SeeConnectingACPower toanEX9204
Switch, “Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch” on page 169, or Connecting AC
Power to an EX9214 Switch.
9. On the external management device, monitor the startup process to ensure that the
system boots properly.
NOTE: After youpoweronapowersupply,wait forat least60secondsbeforeyou turn itoff.After youpoweroffapowersupply,wait forat least60secondsbefore you turn it back on.
If the system is completely powered off when you switch on a power supply,the REmodule boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence.If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power off the systemagain, first issue the CLI request system halt command.
After you power on a power supply, it can take up to 60 seconds for statusindicatorssuchaspowersupplyLEDsandtheshowchassisoperationalmode
CLI command display to indicate that the power supply is functioningnormally. Ignore any error indicators that might appear during the first 60seconds.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.172
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
RelatedDocumentation
Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9204 Switch•
• Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 137
• Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9214 Switch
Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch
An EX9208 switch can be configured with up to four DC power supplies.
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power isremoved from theDC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuitbreaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuitbreaker to theOFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker
in theOFF position.
CAUTION: Before you connect power to the switch, a licensed electricianmust attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply.Acablewithan incorrectlyattached lugcandamage theswitch (for example,by causing a short circuit).
CAUTION: Mixing AC and DC power supplies in the same chassis is not asupported configuration.
NOTE: Each power supply input feedmust be connected to a dedicated DCpower source outlet.
Before you begin connecting DC power to an EX9208 switch:
• Ensure that youhave taken thenecessaryprecautions topreventelectrostaticdischarge
(ESD) damage (see “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280).
• Ensure that you have connected the switch chassis to earth ground.
CAUTION: Tomeet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI)requirements and to ensure proper operation, youmust connect EX9208switches to earth ground before you connect them to power. Forinstallations that require a separate grounding conductor to the chassis,use the protective earthing terminal on the switch chassis to connect toearth ground. For instructions on connecting an EX9208 switch to groundusing a separate grounding conductor, see “Connecting Earth Ground toan EX Series Switch” on page 159.
173Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
• Install thepower supply in the chassis. See “Installing aDCPowerSupply in anEX9208
Switch” on page 139.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to connect DC power to an
EX9208 switch:
• ESD grounding strap
• DC power source cables (not provided) with the cable lugs (provided) attached.
The provided cable lugs in an EX9208 switch are sized for 6 AWG (13.3 mm2) power
source cables. The DC power source cables that you provide must be 6 AWG (13.3
mm2), minimum 60°C wire. We recommend that you install heat-shrink tubing
insulation around the power cables and lugs.
• 3/8-in. (9.5-mm) nut driver or socket wrench
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1 and 2
• Multimeter
WARNING: Ensure that the power cords do not block access to switchcomponents or drape where people can trip on them.
To connect DC power to an EX9208 switch:
1. Switchoff thededicated customer site circuit breakers. Ensure that the voltageacross
the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cable
leads might become active during installation.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
3. Move the power switch on the power supply faceplate to the off (O) position.
4. Using a screwdriver, loosen the captive screw holding the metal cover over the DIP
inputmodeswitch.Remove themetal cover fromtheDIP inputmodeswitch toexpose
the switch.
5. Check the setting of the DIP input mode switch. Use a sharp, nonconductive object
to slide the switch to the desired position. Set the inputmode switch to position 0 for
60A inputandposition 1 for 70A input (seeFigure60onpage 175). This setting is used
by the power management software and needs to be set before you switch on the
power supply.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.174
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 60: DIP Input Mode Switch
g004
725
6. Install themetal cover over theDIP inputmodeswitch, anduseascrewdriver to tighten
the captive screw.
7. Remove the plastic cable cover from the DC power input terminals.
8. Verify that the DC power cables are correctly labeled before making connections to
thepower supply. In a typical powerdistribution schemewhere the return is connected
to chassis groundat thebattery plant, youcanuseamultimeter to verify the resistance
of the –48V and RTN DC cables to chassis ground:
• The cable with very large resistance (indicating an open circuit) to chassis ground
is –48V.
• The cable with very low resistance (indicating a closed circuit) to chassis ground is
RTN.
CAUTION: Youmust ensure that power connectionsmaintain the properpolarity. Thepower source cablesmight be labeled (+)and (–) to indicatetheir polarity. There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. Thecolor coding usedby the externalDCpower source at your site determinesthe color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to theterminal studs on each power supply.
9. Remove the washers and nuts from each DC power input terminal, using a 7/16-in.
[11-mm] nut driver or socket wrench.
10. Secure each power cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the flat washer, then
with the splitwasher, and thenwith thenut (seeFigure61onpage 177). Applybetween
23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut. Do not overtighten the
nut. (Use a 7/16-in. [11-mm] torque-controlled driver or socket wrench.)
a. Secure the positive (+) DC source power cable lug to the RTN (return) terminal.
b. Secure the negative (–) DC source power cable lug to the –48V (input) terminal.
CAUTION: Ensure thateachpowercable lugseats flushagainst thesurfaceof the terminal block as you are tightening the nuts. Ensure that each nut
175Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
is properly threaded onto the terminal stud. Youmust be able to spin thenut freely with your fingers when it is first placed onto the terminal stud.Applying installation torque to the nut when improperly threadedmayresult in damage to the terminal stud.
CAUTION: Themaximum torque rating of the terminal studs on the DCpower supply is 36 lb-in. (4.0 Nm). The terminal studsmay be damagedif excessive torque is applied.Useonlya torque-controlleddriver or socketwrench to tighten nuts on the DC power supply terminal studs.
CAUTION: The DC power supplies in PEM0 and PEM1must be powered
bydedicatedpower feedsderived from feedA, and theDCpower supplies
in PEM2 and PEM3must be powered by dedicated power feeds derived
fromfeedB. This configurationprovides thecommonlydeployedA/B feed
redundancy for the system.
For information about connecting to DC power sources, see “DC Power Supply
Specifications for EX9208 Switches” on page 112.
11. Route the power cables along the cable restraint toward the left or right corner of the
chassis. If needed, thread plastic cable ties, which youmust provide, through the
openings on the cable restraint to hold the power cables in place.
12. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate.
13. Verify that the power cabling is correct, that the cables are not touching or blocking
access to switch components, and that they do not drapewhere people could trip on
them.
14. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers. Follow your site's procedures
for safety and ESD.
Verify that the INPUTOK LED on the power supply glows green.
15. On each of the DC power supplies, switch the DC circuit breaker to the center position
before moving it to the on (|) position.
NOTE: The circuit breaker may bounce back to the off (O) position if you
move the breaker too quickly.
Observe the statusLEDson thepower supply faceplate. If thepower supply is correctly
installed and functioning normally, the PWROK, BRKRON, and INPUTOK LEDs glow
steady green.
16. Repeat Steps 2 through 15 for the remaining power supplies.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.176
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
NOTE: A Switch Fabric modulemust be installed for the PWROK LED to
function.
Figure 61: Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 switch
RelatedDocumentation
Powering On a DC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 177•
• DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50
• DC Power Supply LEDs in an EX9208 Switch on page 52
Powering On a DC-Powered EX9200 Switch
Before you power on the switch, ensure that:
• You have installed all required switch components.
• You have installed the required number of power supplies to support redundant
operation for the switch configuration.
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• An ESD grounding strap.
• An external management device such as a PC.
177Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
• A cable to connect the external management device to the console (CONSOLE) port
or the Ethernet management (<...>) port on themaster Routing Engine module (RE
module).
For connecting amanagement device to the console port, see “Connecting anEX9200
Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary Device” on page 166. For connecting
amanagement device to the management port, see “Connecting an EX9200 Switch
to a Network for Out-of-Band Management” on page 165.
To power on the switch:
1. Connect the external management device to the master REmodule's Ethernet
management (<...>) port.
2. Turn on the power to the external management device.
3. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
4. Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and that each of their
handles is flush against the faceplate.
5. Verify that the source power cables are connected to the appropriate terminal: the
positive (+) source cable to the return terminal (labeled RTN) and the negative (–)
source cable to the input terminal (labeled –48V).
6. Switch on the dedicated customer site circuit breakers to provide power to the DC
power cables.
7. Check the INPUTOK LED is lit steadily green to verify that power is present.
8. If power is not present:
• Verify that the fuse is installed correctly and turn on the breaker at the battery
distribution fuse board or fuse bay.
• Check the voltage with ameter at the terminals of the power supply for correct
voltage level and polarity.
9. On each of the DC power supplies, switch the DC circuit breaker to the center position
before moving it to the On (—) position.
NOTE: The circuit breakermight bounce back to theOffO) position if you
move the breaker too quickly.
If any of the status LEDs indicates that the power supply is not functioning normally,
repeat the installationandcablingprocedures. SeeConnectingDCPower toanEX9204
Switch, “Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch” on page 173, or Connecting DC
Power to an EX9214 Switch.
10. Verify that the BREAKERON LED glows steady green.
11. Verify that thePWROKLEDglowssteadygreen, indicating thepower supply is correctly
installed and functioning normally.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.178
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
If the power supply is not functioning normally, repeat the installation and cabling
procedures.
NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait for at least 60 secondsbefore turning it back on. After powering on a power supply, wait for atleast 60 seconds before turning it off.
If the system is completely powered off when you power on the powersupply, theRoutingEnginebootsas thepowersupplycompletes its startupsequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to poweroff the system again, first issue the CLI request system halt command.
After apower supply is poweredon, it can takeup to60seconds for statusindicators—such as the status LEDs on the power supply and theshow chassis command display—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear during the first60 seconds.
12. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, monitor the
startup process to verify that the system has booted properly.
RelatedDocumentation
Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9204 Switch•
• Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 139
• Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9214 Switch
179Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 10: Connecting the Switch
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.180
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 11
Performing Initial Configuration
• EX9200 Switch Default Configuration on page 181
• Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 182
EX9200 Switch Default Configuration
Each EX9200 switch is programmedwith a factory default configuration that contains
the values set for each configuration parameter when a switch is shipped. The default
configuration file sets values for system parameters such as the Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) aging timer, the system log, and file messages, while also enabling the
Link LayerDiscoveryProtocol (LLDP)protocol, theRapidSpanningTreeProtocol (RSTP),
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping, and storm control.
When you commit changes to the configuration, a new configuration file is created that
becomes the active configuration. You can always revert to the factory default
configuration. See Reverting to the Default Factory Configuration for the EX Series Switch.
This topic shows the factory default configuration file of an EX9200 switch:
system {arp {aging-timer 5;
}syslog {user * {any emergency;
}file messages {any notice;authorization info;
}file interactive-commands {interactive-commands any;
}}
}protocols {lldp {interface all;
}}
181Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
RelatedDocumentation
Configuration Files Terms•
• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (CLI Procedure)
• Connecting and Configuring an EX Series Switch (J-Web Procedure)
• Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure) on page 182
• Understanding Configuration Files for EX Series Switches
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Connecting and Configuring an EX9200 Switch (CLI Procedure)
The EX9200 switch is shippedwith the JunosOSpreinstalled and ready to be configured
when the switch is powered on. There are three copies of the software: one on a
CompactFlash card in the Routing Engine module (REmodule), one on a rotating hard
disk in the REmodule, and one on a USB flash drive that can be inserted into the slot in
the faceplate of the REmodule.
When the switch boots, it first attempts to start the image on theUSB flash drive. If there
is no USB flash drive inserted into the REmodule or if the attempt otherwise fails, the
switch next attempts to start the software from the CompactFlash card (if installed),
and finally from the hard disk.
You configure the switch by issuing Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) commands,
either on a console device attached to the console (CONSOLE) port on themaster RE
module, or overa telnet connection toanetworkconnected to theEthernetmanagement
(<...>) port on themaster REmodule.
Gather the following information before configuring the switch:
• Name the switch will use on the network
• Domain name the switch will use
• IP address and prefix length information for the Ethernet interface
• IP address of a default switch
• IP address of a DNS server
• Password for the root user
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.182
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
This procedure connects the switch to the network, but does not enable it to forward
traffic. For complete information about enabling the switch to forward traffic, including
examples, see the Junos OS configuration guides.
To configure the software:
1. Verify that the switch is powered on.
2. Log in as the root user. There is no password.
3. Start the CLI.
root# cliroot@>
4. Enter configuration mode.
cli> configure[edit]root@#
5. Set the root authentication password by entering either a clear-text password, an
encrypted password, or an SSH public key string (DSA or RSA).
[edit]root@# set system root-authentication plain-text-passwordNew password: passwordRetype new password: password
or
[edit]root@# set system root-authentication encrypted-password encrypted-password
or
[edit]root@# set system root-authentication ssh-dsa public-key
or
[edit]root@# set system root-authentication ssh-rsa public-key
6. Configure the name of the switch. If the name includes spaces, enclose the name in
quotation marks (“ ”).
[edit]root@# set system host-name host-name
7. Create a user account.
[edit]root@# set system login user user-name authentication plain-text-passwordNew password: passwordRetype new password: password
8. Set the user account class to super-user.
[edit]root@# set system login user user-name class super-user
9. Configure the switch’s domain name.
183Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 11: Performing Initial Configuration
[edit]root@# set system domain-name domain-name
10. Configure the IP address and prefix length for the switch’s Ethernet interface.
[edit]root@# set interfaces fxp0 unit 0 family inet address address/prefix-length
11. Configure the IP address of a DNS server.
[edit]root@# set system name-server address
12. (Optional) Configure the static routes to remote subnets with access to the
management port. Access to themanagement port is limited to the local subnet. For
more information about static routes, see the Junos OS Administration Library for
Routing Devices.
[edit]root@# set routing-options static route remote-subnet next-hop destination-IP retainno-readvertise
13. Configure the telnet service at the [edit system services] hierarchy level.
[edit]root@# set system services telnet
14. (Optional) Display the configuration to verify that it is correct.
[edit]root@# showsystem {host-name host-name;domain-name domain-name;root-authentication {authentication-method (password | public-key);
}name-server {address;
}}interfaces {fxp0 {unit 0 {family inet {address address/prefix-length;
}}
}}
15. Commit the configuration to activate it on the switch.
[edit]root@# commit
16. (Optional) Configure additional properties by adding the necessary configuration
statements. Then commit the changes to activate them on the switch.
[edit]
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.184
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
root@switch# commit
17. When you have finished configuring the switch, exit configuration mode.
[edit]root@switch# exitroot@switch>
NOTE: To reinstall JunosOS, youboot the switch from the removablemedia.Do not insert the removablemedia during normal operations. The switchdoes not operate normally when it is booted from the removablemedia.
When the switch boots from the storagemedia (removable media, CompactFlash card,
or hard disk) it expands its search in the /config directory of the routing platform for the
following files in the followingorder: juniper.conf (themain configuration file), rescue.conf
(the rescue configuration file), and juniper.conf.1 (the first rollback configuration file).
When the first configuration file is found that can be loaded properly, the search ends
and the file is loaded. If none of the file can be loaded properly, the routing platform does
not functionproperly. If the switchboots fromanalternatebootdevice, JunosOSdisplays
a message indication this when you log in to the switch.
RelatedDocumentation
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
185Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 11: Performing Initial Configuration
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.186
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 4
Removing the Switch and SwitchComponents
• Removing the Switch on page 189
• Removing Switch Components on page 193
187Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.188
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 12
Removing the Switch
• Powering Off an EX9200 Switch on page 189
• RemovinganEX9200Switch fromaRackorCabinetUsingaMechanicalLiftonpage 190
• Removing an EX9208 Switch from a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a Mechanical
Lift on page 191
Powering Off an EX9200 Switch
Before you power off the switch:
• Ensure that you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage.
See “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to power off the switch:
• An ESD grounding strap
• An external management device such as a PC
• A cable to connect the external management device to the console port (CONSOLE)
or management port (<...>) on themaster Routing Engine module (REmodule).
To power off the switch:
1. Connect a management console device to the master REmodule. For information
about connecting amanagement device to the console (CONSOLE) port, see
“Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Management Console or an Auxiliary Device” on
page 166. For information about connecting amanagement device to the Ethernet
management (<...>) port, see “Connecting an EX9200 Switch to a Network for
Out-of-Band Management” on page 165.
2. On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, issue the
requestsystemhaltboth-routing-enginesoperationalmodecommand.Thecommand
shuts down the Routing Engines cleanly, so their state information is preserved. (If
the switchcontainsonlyoneRoutingEngine, issue the requestsystemhaltcommand.)
For more information about these commands, see the Junos OS Operational Mode
Commands.
3. Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
has halted.
189Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
4. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
5. Move the AC input switch on each AC power supply or the DC circuit breaker on each
DC power supply to the Off (O) position.
RelatedDocumentation
Powering On an AC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 171•
• Powering On a DC-Powered EX9200 Switch on page 177
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 169
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 173
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9214 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9214 Switch
Removing an EX9200 Switch from a Rack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift
Considering the size and weight of the switch, we strongly recommend you use a
mechanical lift to remove the switch.
Before you remove the switch using a lift:
• Ensure that the rack or cabinet is stable and secured to the building.
• Ensure that there is enough space to place the removed switch in its new location and
shift it along the path to the new location.
• Read “General Safety Guidelines andWarnings” on page 249,with particular attention
to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX9200 Switches” on page 265.
• Ensure that the switch has been safely powered off (see “Powering Off an EX9200
Switch” on page 189) and that you have disconnected the power cords from the power
supplies.
• Ensure that you have disconnected any cables or wires attached to the switch ports.
CAUTION: When removingmore than one switch from a rack or cabinet,remove theswitch in the topof the rackor cabinet first andproceed to removethe rest of the switches from top to bottom.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• Amechanical lift
• A Phillips (+) screwdrivers, number 1 and 2
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.190
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
To remove the switch using a lift:
1. Use the appropriate screwdriver to remove themounting screws that attach the
chassis front-mounting brackets to the rack or cabinet.
2. Move the lift to the rack and position it so that its platform is centered about 0.5 in.
(1.27 cm) below the bottom of the switch chassis and as close to it as possible.
3. Carefully slide the switch from the adjustablemounting brackets attached to the rack
onto the lift.
4. Use the lift to transport the switch to its new location.
RelatedDocumentation
Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129•
Removing an EX9208 Switch from aRack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift
If you cannot use amechanical lift to remove an EX9208 switch from a rack or a cabinet
(the preferred method), you can remove it manually.
CAUTION: The chassis with only the backplane and no other componentsweighs approximately 65.5 lb (29.7 kg). Lifting the chassis and removing itfrom a rack or cabinet requires at least three people.
Thechassis has twohandles.Donot lift a fully loadedchassis by thehandles;make sure the chassis is empty before you lift it. If two of the people liftingthe chassis use the handles to lift it, the third personmust lift from the rearof the chassis. The rear of the chassis is heavier than the front of the chassis,sowhenyou lift thechassisby thehandles, thechassis tips toward theheavierback end. The person lifting from the backmust be aware of this behaviorandmust be braced to prevent the chassis from tipping over.
When lifting the chassis, do not grasp the switch by the blue panel at the topfront of the chassis. Doing so can cause the panel to pop off of the switch.
CAUTION: When removingmore than one switch from a rack, remove theswitch at the top first. We strongly recommend removing a switch that is inan upper position in a rack or cabinet with a lift.
Before you remove the switch:
• Ensure that the rack or cabinet is stable and secured to the building.
• Ensure that there is enough space to place the removed switch in its new location and
shift it along the path to the new location.
• Reviewchassis lifting guidelines asdescribed in “Chassis LiftingGuidelines for EX9200
Switches” on page 265.
191Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 12: Removing the Switch
• Ensure that the switch has been safely powered off (see “Powering Off an EX9200
Switch” on page 189) and that you have unplugged (disconnected) the power cords to
the power supplies.
• Ensure that you have disconnected any cables or wires attached to the switch ports.
• Remove all components except the midplane from the chassis. See:
• Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 202
• Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch on page 204
• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch on page 197
• Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 193
• Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 195
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove the switch:
• A Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2 or number 3, depending on the size of your rack
mounting screws
To remove the switch from the rack:
1. Use the appropriate screwdriver to remove the 24mounting screws that attach the
chassis front-mounting brackets to the rack or cabinet.
WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with yourlegs, not your back. Do not twist your body as you lift. Balance the loadevenly and be sure that your footing is firm.
2. With one person on each side and one person at the back, hold onto the bottom of
the chassis and carefully lift it out of the adjustable mounting brackets attached to
the rack. If you have a pallet jack, move the switch onto the pallet jack.
3. Carefully move the chassis to its new location.
After youmove the switch to its new location, reinstall the components in the chassis or
store the components in antistatic bags. See:
• Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 145
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch on page 141
• Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 137
• Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 139
RelatedDocumentation
• RemovinganEX9200Switch fromaRackorCabinetUsingaMechanicalLiftonpage 190
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.192
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 13
Removing Switch Components
• Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 193
• Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch on page 195
• Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch on page 197
• Taking the Host SubsystemOffline in an EX9200 Switch on page 199
• Removing an RE Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 200
• Removing an SF Module from an EX9200 Switch on page 202
• Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch on page 204
• Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from a Switch on page 206
• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 207
• Disconnecting the Alarm RelayWires from the Craft Interface in an EX9200
Switch on page 209
• Removing Cable Management Brackets from an EX9208 Switch on page 209
Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch
The AC power supply in an EX9208 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceableunit (FRU).You removeACpower supplies fromthe frontof thechassis.
CAUTION: Before you remove a power supply, ensure that you have powersuppliessufficient topower theswitch that remains in thechassis.See“PowerRequirements for EX9200 Switch Components” on page 113.
CAUTION: Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long timewhilethe switch is operational. Either replace the power supply unit promptly orinstall a cover panel over the empty slot.
NOTE: After poweringoff apower supply,wait for at least60secondsbeforeturning it back on.
193Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Before you remove an AC power supply from the switch:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove an AC power
supply from an EX9208 switch chassis:
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1 and 2
• Replacement power supply or a cover panel for the power supply slot
CAUTION: Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long timewhilethe switch is operational. Either replace the power supply promptly or installa cover panel over the empty slot.
To remove an AC power supply from an EX9208 switch (see Figure 62 on page 195):
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply, and
remove the power cord from the AC power source. Follow the instructions for your
site.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
3. Move the AC input switch next to the appliance inlet on the power supply to the Off
(O) position.
4. Remove the power cord from the power supply.
5. Remove thepower cord fromtheACappliance inlet on theACpower supply faceplate.
6. Unscrew the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply.
7. Pull the power supply straight out of the chassis.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.194
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 62: Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch
RelatedDocumentation
Installing an AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 137•
• AC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 47
Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch
The DC power supply in an EX9208 switch is a hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceableunit (FRU). You removeDCpower supplies fromthe front of the chassis.
CAUTION: Before you remove a power supply, ensure that you have powersuppliessufficient topower theswitch that remains in thechassis.See“PowerRequirements for EX9200 Switch Components” on page 113.
Before you remove a DC power supply from the switch:
• Ensure that you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage.
See “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that youhave the followingparts and tools available to removeaDCpower supply
from an EX9208 switch chassis:
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1 and 2
• 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) nut driver or socket wrench
• Replacement power supply or cover panel for the power supply slot
195Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
CAUTION: Do not leave the power supply slot empty for a long timewhilethe switch is operational. Either replace the power supply unit promptly orinstall a cover panel over the empty slot.
WARNING: Before performing DC power procedures, ensure that power isremoved from theDC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuitbreaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuitbreaker to the off position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breakerin the off position.
NOTE: After poweringoff apower supply,wait for at least60secondsbeforeturning it back on.
To remove a DC power supply from an EX9208 switch (see Figure 63 on page 197):
1. Switch off the dedicated customer site circuit breaker for the power supply being
removed. Follow your site's procedures for ESD.
2. Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that
there is no chance that the cables might become active during the removal process.
3. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
4. Move the DC circuit breaker on the DC power supply faceplate to the off (O) position
5. Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate.
6. Remove the nut andwasher from each of the terminal studs. (Use a 7/16-in. [11-mm]
nut driver or socket wrench.)
7. Remove the cable lugs from the terminal studs.
8. Loosen the captive screws on the bottom edge of the power supply faceplate using
a screwdriver.
9. Carefully move the power cables out of the way.
10. Pull the power supply straight out of the chassis.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.196
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 63: Removing a DC Power Supply from an EX9208 Switch
RelatedDocumentation
Installing a DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 139•
• DC Power Supply in an EX9208 Switch on page 50
Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch
The fan tray in anEX9200switch is ahot-insertableandhot-removable field-replaceable
unit (FRU); You can remove and replace it while the switch is running without turning off
power to the switch or disrupting switching functions.
CAUTION: Do not remove the fan tray unless you have a replacement fantray available.
Before you remove a fan tray:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdrivers, number 1 and 2
• Replacement fan tray
To remove a fan tray from an EX9200 switch chassis:
197Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
1. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
2. Loosen the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate using a screwdriver.
3. Grasp the fan tray handle, and pull it out approximately 1 to 3 inches.
4. Press the latch located on the inside of the fan tray to release it from the chassis.
5. Place one hand under the fan tray to support it, and pull the fan tray completely out
of the chassis.
Figure 64 on page 198 shows removing a fan try from an EX9208 switch. The procedure
and orientation of the fan tray are the same for EX9204. The procedure is the same for
EX9214 switch; however, the orientation of the fan try is different— it is installed
horizontally into the top and bottom of the chassis (see Figure 65 on page 199).
Figure 64: Removing a Fan Tray from an EX9200 Switch
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.198
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 65: Removing the Upper Fan Tray in an EX9214 Switch
g022
046
RelatedDocumentation
Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch on page 141•
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9204 Switch
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9208 Switch on page 53
• Cooling System and Airflow in an EX9214 Switch
• Field-Replaceable Units in an EX9200 Switch on page 27
Taking the Host SubsystemOffline in an EX9200 Switch
Before removing a Routing Engine module (REmodule) from an EX9200 switch, take
the host subsystem offline.
Thehostsubsystemperformsswitchingandsystemmanagement functions inanEX9200
switch.
To take a host subsystem offline:
1. Determine whether the host subsystem is the master or backup using one of these
methods:
199Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
• Look at theMASTER LED on the REmodule faceplate. If theMASTER LED is lit
steady green, the corresponding host subsystem is functioning as the master.
• Issue the show chassis routing-engine CLI command. The output of this command
will showwhether the host subsystem is functioning as the master or backup.
2. If thehost subsystem is functioningas themaster, switch it tobackupusing the request
chassis routing-enginemaster switch command.
3. On theconsoleor othermanagementdevice connected to themasterRoutingEngine,
enterCLIoperationalmodeand issue the requestsystemhaltcommand.Thecommand
shuts down the Routing Engine gracefully, so its state information is preserved.
Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
has halted.
NOTE: The Switch Fabric module (SFmodule) might continue forwardingtraffic for approximately 5minutes after the request system halt commandhas been issued.
RelatedDocumentation
Maintaining Host Subsystem in EX9200 Switches on page 213•
• Host Subsystem in an EX9200 Switch on page 26
Removing an REModule from an EX9200 Switch
CAUTION: Donot lift theRoutingEnginemodule (REmodule)byholding theejector levers. The levers cannot support the weight of themodule. Liftingthemodule by the levers might bend the levers. Bent levers will prevent theREmodule from being properly seated in the chassis.
Before you begin to remove an REmodule:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
• Remove all the cables connected to the REmodule.
CAUTION: Before you remove an REmodule, youmust take the hostsubsystemoffline. If there isonlyoneREmodule installed in theswitch, takingthe host subsystem offline shuts down the switch.
CAUTION: If the REmodule to be removed is functioning as themasterRouting Engine, switch it to be the backup Routing Engine before removingit.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.200
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• ESD grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdrivers, number 1 and 2
• Antistatic bag or antistatic mat
To remove an REmodule from an EX9200 switch:
1. Take thehost subsystemoffline.See “Taking theHostSubsystemOffline inanEX9200
Switch” on page 199.
2. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
3. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your barewrist and connect the strap to one of the
ESD points on the chassis.
4. Verify that the REmodule LEDs are off.
5. Loosen the screws on each side of the REmodule by turning them counterclockwise
using the screwdriver until they are completely unseated.
6. Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the REmodule.
7. Grasp the REmodule by the ejector handles and slide it about halfway out of the
chassis.
8. Taking care not to touch the leads, pins, or solder connections, place one hand
underneath the REmodule to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis.
9. Place the REmodule in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat.
CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after youremove them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on astable, flat surface.
NOTE: Tomaintain proper airflow through the chassis, do not leave anSwitch Fabricmodule (SFmodule) installed in the chassis without an REmodule for extended periods of time. If you remove an REmodule, installa replacement REmodule as soon as possible.
Figure 66 on page 202 shows removing an REmodule from an EX9204 switch. The
procedure is the same for all EX9200 switches.
201Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
Figure 66: Removing an REModule from an EX9200 Switch
g022
0400
2
1 0
1
ESD
RoutingEngine
RelatedDocumentation
Installing an RE Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 143•
• Host Subsystem in an EX9200 Switch on page 26
Removing an SFModule from an EX9200 Switch
Youmust remove the Switch Fabric module (SFmodule) from an EX9200 switch if you
need to replace the module or if you need to remove the switch components before
moving the chassis without using amechanical lift. You can remove the SFmodule and
the Routing Engine module (REmodule) as a unit, or remove the REmodule separately.
NOTE: Do not lift the SFmodule by holding the ejector levers. The leverscannot support the weight of themodule. Lifting themodules by the leversmight bend the levers. Bent levers will prevent the SFmodule from beingproperly seated in the chassis.
CAUTION: Before you replace an SFmodule, youmust take the hostsubsystem offline. If there is only one host subsystem, taking the hostsubsystem offline shuts down the switch.
Before you begin to remove an SFmodule:
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• ESD grounding strap
• Antistatic bag or antistatic mat
• Replacement SFmodule or cover panel for the slot
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.202
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
To remove an SFmodule:
1. Take thehost subsystemoffline.See “Taking theHostSubsystemOffline inanEX9200
Switch” on page 199.
2. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
3. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the chassis.
4. Rotate theejectorhandles simultaneously counterclockwise tounseat theSFmodule.
5. Grasp the ejector handles and slide the SFmodule about halfway out of the chassis.
6. Place one hand underneath the SFmodule to support it, and slide it completely out
of the chassis. Place it on the antistatic mat.
CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after youremove them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on astable, flat surface.
7. If you are not replacing the SFmodule, install a cover panel over the empty slot.
Figure 67 on page 203 shows removing an SFmodule from an EX9208 switch. The
procedure is the same for all EX9200 switches.
Figure 67: Removing an SFModule from an EX9200 Switch
ESD
g022
008
SF
Ejectors
RelatedDocumentation
Installing an SF Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 145•
• Switch Fabric Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 32
• Routing Engine Module in an EX9200 Switch on page 29
203Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch
EX9200 switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) line cards that can be installed in
the line card slots on the front of the switch chassis. The line cards are hot-insertable
and hot-removable: You can remove and replace themwithout powering off the switch
ordisrupting switch functions.However,we recommend that you take themofflinebefore
removing them.
Before you begin removing a line card from an EX9200 switch:
• Ensure that youhave taken thenecessaryprecautions topreventelectrostaticdischarge
(ESD) damage. See “Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
• If there are any transceivers installed in the line card, remove them before you remove
the line card. See “Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch” on page 207.
• Ensure that you knowhow to handle and store the line card. See “Handling andStoring
Line Cards in EX9200 Switches” on page 218.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove a line card from
an EX9200 switch chassis:
• ESD grounding strap
• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat
• Replacement line card or a cover panel and its captive screws to cover the empty slot
To remove a line card from an EX9200 switch:
1. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Attach the ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist, and connect the strap to the ESD
point on the switch chassis.
3. Label the cables connected to each port on the line card so you can reconnect the
cables to the correct ports.
4. Take the line card offline by issuing the following CLI command:
user@switch> request chassis fpc slot slot-number offline
5. Rotate the ejector handles simultaneously counterclockwise to unseat the line card.
6. Grasp the handles, and gently slide the line card halfway out of the chassis.
See “Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches” on page 218.
CAUTION: Do not lift the line card by holding the ejector levers on thefaceplate or the edge connectors. The levers cannot support the weightof the line card. Lifting the line cards by the leversmight bend them. Bentlevers prevent the line cards from being properly seated in the chassis.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.204
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: Do not stack line cards on top of one another or on top of anyother component. Place each line card separately in the antistatic bag oron the antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
CAUTION: The weight of line cards in EX9200 switches is in the range14–19.4 lb (6.6–8.8 kg). Be prepared to support the full weight as youslide the line card into the chassis.
7. Place one hand around the faceplate of the line card and the other hand under the
line card to support it. Taking care not to touch line card components, pins, leads, or
solder connections, gently slide the line card completely out of the chassis and place
it in an antistatic bag or on its own antistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
CAUTION: After removing a line card, wait for at least 30 seconds beforeinstalling a line card or removing another line card.
8. If you are not installing a line card in the emptied line card slot within a short time,
install a cover panel over the slot. Do this to protect the interior of the chassis from
dust or other foreign substances and to ensure that the airflow inside the chassis is
not disrupted.
Figure68onpage205shows removinga linecard fromanEX9204switch.Theprocedure
and orientation of the line card are the same for EX9208. The procedure is the same for
EX9214 switch; however, the orientation of the line cards is different—it is installed
vertically into the top and bottom of the chassis.
Figure 68: Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch
0
2
1 0
1
ESD
g022
032
Line card
Ejectors
RelatedDocumentation
Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152•
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
205Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic Cable from a Switch
EX Series switches and OCX1100 switches have field-replaceable unit (FRU) optical
transceivers to which you can connect fiber-optic cables.
Before you begin disconnecting a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed
in a switch, ensure that you have taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of
lasers. See “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches” on page 257.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• A rubber safety cap to cover the transceiver
• A rubber safety cap to cover the fiber-optic cable connector
To disconnect a fiber-optic cable from an optical transceiver installed in the switch:
1. Disable theport inwhich the transceiver is installedby issuing the followingcommand:
[edit interfaces]user@switch# set interface-name disable
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into theends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cablesconnected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
2. Carefully unplug the fiber-optic cable connector from the transceiver.
3. Cover the transceiver with a rubber safety cap.
WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered exceptwheninserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port cleanand prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
4. Cover the fiber-optic cable connector with the rubber safety cap.
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to a Switch on page 156•
• Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch on page 207
• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in Switches on page 223
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on OCX1100 Switches
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.206
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch
The transceivers for EX Series switches are hot-removable and hot-insertable
field-replaceable units (FRUs): You can remove and replace themwithout powering off
the switch or disrupting switch functions.
NOTE: After you remove a transceiver or when you change themedia-typeconfiguration, wait for 6 seconds for the interface to display the operationalcommands.
Before you begin removing a transceiver from an EX Series switch, ensure that you have
taken the necessary precautions for safe handling of lasers (see “Laser and LED Safety
Guidelines andWarnings for Switches” on page 257).
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• An antistatic bag or an antistatic mat
• Rubber safety caps to cover the transceiver and fiber-optic cable connector
• A dust cover to cover the port
Figure 69 on page 208 shows how to remove a QSFP+ transceiver. The procedure is the
same for all types of transceivers except the CFP transceivers.
To remove a transceiver from an EX Series switch:
1. Place the antistatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
2. Label the cable connected to the transceiver so that you can reconnect it correctly.
WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic transceiver or into theends of fiber-optic cables. Fiber-optic transceivers and fiber-optic cablesconnected to transceivers emit laser light that can damage your eyes.
WARNING: Do not leave a fiber-optic transceiver uncovered exceptwheninserting or removing a cable. The rubber safety cap keeps the port cleanand prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
CAUTION: Do not bend fiber-optic cables beyond their minimum bendradius.Anarcsmaller thana few inches indiametercandamagethecablesand cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
3. Remove the cable connected to the transceiver (see “Disconnecting a Fiber-Optic
Cable fromaSwitch”onpage206).Cover thetransceiverandtheendofeachfiber-optic
207Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
cable connector with a rubber safety cap immediately after disconnecting the
fiber-optic cables.
4. To remove an SFP, SFP+, XFP, or QSFP+ transceiver:
a. By using your fingers, pull open the ejector lever on the transceiver to unlock the
transceiver.
CAUTION: Before removing the transceiver, make sure you open theejector lever completely until you hear it click. This prevents damageto the transceiver.
b. Grasp the transceiver ejector lever and gently slide the transceiver approximately
0.5 in. (1.3 cm) straight out of the port.
CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to thetransceiver, do not touch the connector pins at the end of thetransceiver.
To remove a CFP transceiver:
a. Loosen the screws on the transceiver by using your fingers.
b. Grasp the screws on the transceiver and gently slide the transceiver approximately
0.5 in. (1.3 cm) straight out of the port.
CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage to thetransceiver, do not touch the connector pins at the end of thetransceiver.
5. By using your fingers, grasp the body of the transceiver and pull it straight out of the
port.
6. Place the transceiver in the antistatic bag or on the antistatic mat placed on a flat,
stable surface.
7. Place the dust cover over the empty port.
Figure 69: Removing a Transceiver from an EX Series Switch
1—Ejector lever
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.208
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
RelatedDocumentation
Installing a Transceiver in an EX Series Switch on page 154•
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
Disconnecting the Alarm RelayWires from the Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch
The craft interface has two alarm relay contacts for connecting the switch to external
alarm devices (see Figure 70 on page 209).
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
• 2.5-mm flat-blade (–) screwdriver
To disconnect the alarm relay wires from the switch and the alarm-reporting device:
1. Disconnect the wire at the external device.
2. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your barewrist, and connect the strap to one of the
ESD points on the chassis.
3. Loosen the small screws on the face of the terminal block using a screwdriver and
remove the block from the relay contact.
4. Loosen the small screwson the sideof the terminal blockusinga screwdriver. Remove
existing wires from the slots in the front of the block.
Figure 70: Alarm Relay Contacts
g022
029
Craft Interface panel
Alarmrelay
contacts
RelatedDocumentation
Connecting the EX9200 Switch to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 167•
• Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch on page 17
Removing Cable Management Brackets from an EX9208 Switch
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available to remove the cable
management brackets from an EX9208 switch chassis:
• Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap
• Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1 and 2
209Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 13: Removing Switch Components
To remove the cable management brackets:
1. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your barewrist, and connect the strap to one of the
ESD points on the chassis.
2. Loosen the captive screws on either side of the chassis by using the screw driver.
3. Remove the cable management brackets.
RelatedDocumentation
Installing Cable Management Brackets on an EX9208 Switch on page 136•
• Cable Management Brackets in an EX9208 Switch on page 23
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.210
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 5
Switch and Component Maintenance
• Routine Maintenance on page 213
211Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.212
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 14
Routine Maintenance
• Routine Maintenance Procedures for EX9200 Switches on page 213
• Maintaining Host Subsystem in EX9200 Switches on page 213
• Maintaining the Air Filter in EX9200 Switches on page 216
• Maintaining the Fan Tray in EX9200 Switches on page 217
• Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218
• Maintaining Line Card Cables in EX9200 Switches on page 222
• Maintaining Power Supplies in EX9200 Switches on page 222
• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in Switches on page 223
RoutineMaintenance Procedures for EX9200 Switches
Purpose For optimum performance of an EX9200 switch, perform preventive maintenance
procedures.
Action Inspect the installation site for moisture, loose wires or cables, and excessive dust.
Make sure that airflow is unobstructed around the switch and into the air intake vents.
•
• Check the status-reporting devices on the craft interface—System alarms and LEDs.
• Inspect theair filter at the left rear of the switch, replacing it every6months for optimum
cooling systemperformance.Donot run theswitch formore thana fewminuteswithout
the air filter in place.
RelatedDocumentation
Maintaining the Air Filter in EX9200 Switches on page 216•
Maintaining Host Subsystem in EX9200 Switches
Purpose For optimum performance of an EX9200 switch, verify the condition of the host
subsystem.Thehost subsystemcomprisesaSwitchFabricandaRoutingEngine.Routing
Enginemodule (REmodule) is installeddirectly intoaSwitchFabricmodule (SFmodule).
213Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Action On a regular basis:
• Check the LEDs on the craft interface to view information about the status of the
Routing Engines.
• Check the LEDs on the SFmodule faceplate.
• Check the LEDs on the REmodule faceplate.
• To check the status of the Routing Engines, issue the show chassis routing-engine
command. The output is similar to the following:
user@switch> show chassis routing-engineRouting Engine status: Slot 0: Current state Master Election priority Master (default) Temperature 31 degrees C / 87 degrees F CPU temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F DRAM 3313 MB (8192 MB installed) Memory utilization 56 percent CPU utilization: User 78 percent Background 0 percent Kernel 21 percent Interrupt 1 percent Idle 0 percent Model RE-S-EX9200-1800X4 Serial ID 9009114067 Start time 2013-02-22 22:28:07 PST Uptime 2 days, 3 hours, 38 minutes, 48 seconds Last reboot reason Router rebooted after a normal shutdown. Load averages: 1 minute 5 minute 15 minute 0.79 0.49 0.42Routing Engine status: Slot 1: Current state Backup Election priority Backup (default) Temperature 33 degrees C / 91 degrees F CPU temperature 31 degrees C / 87 degrees F DRAM 3313 MB (16384 MB installed) Memory utilization 28 percent CPU utilization: User 6 percent Background 0 percent Kernel 6 percent Interrupt 1 percent Idle 88 percent Model RE-S-EX9200-1800X4 Serial ID 9009118544 Start time 2013-02-22 22:27:58 PST Uptime 2 days, 3 hours, 38 minutes, 44 seconds Last reboot reason Router rebooted after a normal shutdown. Load averages: 1 minute 5 minute 15 minute 0.06 0.02 0.00
The output is of an EX9208 switch. The output is similar for all EX9200 switches.
• To check the status of the Switch Fabrics, issue the show chassis environment cb
command. The output is similar to the following:
user@switch> show chassis environment cb
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.214
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CB 0 status: State Online Master Temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F Power 1 1.0 V 1005 mV 1.2 V 1218 mV 1.5 V 1475 mV 1.8 V 1830 mV 2.5 V 2520 mV 3.3 V 3345 mV 5.0 V 5053 mV 5.0 V RE 4962 mV 12.0 V 12220 mV 12.0 V RE 12123 mV Power 2 4.6 V bias MidPlane 4840 mV 11.3 V bias PEM 11176 mV 11.3 V bias FPD 11292 mV 11.3 V bias POE 0 11272 mV 11.3 V bias POE 1 11311 mV Bus Revision 64 FPGA Revision 13 PMBus Expected Measured Measured Calculated device voltage voltage current power XF ASIC A 1000 mV 998 mV 13609 mA 13581 mW XF ASIC B 1000 mV 1000 mV 12390 mA 12390 mWCB 1 status: State Online Standby Temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F Power 1 1.0 V 1002 mV 1.2 V 1214 mV 1.5 V 1472 mV 1.8 V 1804 mV 2.5 V 2520 mV 3.3 V 3325 mV 5.0 V 5053 mV 5.0 V RE 4969 mV 12.0 V 12239 mV 12.0 V RE 12239 mV Power 2 4.6 V bias MidPlane 4840 mV 11.3 V bias PEM 11176 mV 11.3 V bias FPD 11234 mV 11.3 V bias POE 0 11176 mV 11.3 V bias POE 1 11214 mV Bus Revision 64 FPGA Revision 13 PMBus Expected Measured Measured Calculated device voltage voltage current power XF ASIC A 1000 mV 1002 mV 11234 mA 11256 mW XF ASIC B 1000 mV 998 mV 11000 mA 10978 mW
The output is of an EX9208 switch. The output is similar for all EX9200 switches.
To check the status of a specific Switch Fabric, issue the show chassis environment cb
command and include the slot number of the SF. The output is similar to the following:
user@switch> show chassis environment cb 0CB 0 status: State Online Master
215Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
Temperature 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F Power 1 1.0 V 1002 mV 1.2 V 1218 mV 1.5 V 1475 mV 1.8 V 1827 mV 2.5 V 2526 mV 3.3 V 3338 mV 5.0 V 5053 mV 5.0 V RE 4969 mV 12.0 V 12220 mV 12.0 V RE 12123 mV Power 2 4.6 V bias MidPlane 4840 mV 11.3 V bias PEM 11176 mV 11.3 V bias FPD 11292 mV 11.3 V bias POE 0 11272 mV 11.3 V bias POE 1 11311 mV Bus Revision 64 FPGA Revision 13 PMBus Expected Measured Measured Calculated device voltage voltage current power XF ASIC A 1000 mV 997 mV 13609 mA 13568 mW XF ASIC B 1000 mV 1000 mV 12484 mA 12484 mW
The output is of an EX9208 switch. The output is similar for all EX9200 switches.
For more information about using the CLI, see the Junos OS documentation.
RelatedDocumentation
Craft Interface in an EX9200 Switch on page 17•
• EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Maintaining the Air Filter in EX9200 Switches
Purpose For optimum cooling, verify the condition of the air filters.
Action Regularly inspect the air filter. A dirty air filter restricts airflow in the unit, producing a
negative effect on the ventilation of the chassis. The filter degrades over time. You
must replace the filter every 6months.
•
CAUTION: Always keep the air filter in place while the switch is operating.Because the fans are very powerful, they could pull small bits of wire orothermaterials into the switch through the unfiltered air intake. This coulddamage the switch components.
• Usespare filterswithinoneyearofmanufacture.Check thedateofmanufactureprinted
on the filter. Store spare air filters in a dark, cool, and dry place. Storing air filters at
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.216
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
higher temperatures, or where they can be exposed to ultraviolet (UV) radiation,
hydrocarbon emissions, or vapors from solvents, can significantly reduce their life.
RelatedDocumentation
Routine Maintenance Procedures for EX9200 Switches on page 213•
Maintaining the Fan Tray in EX9200 Switches
Purpose For optimum cooling, verify the condition of the fans.
Action Monitor the status of the fans. A fan tray contains multiple fans that work in unison to
cool the switch components. If one fan fails, the host subsystem adjusts the speed of
•
the remaining fans to maintain proper cooling. A major alarm is triggered when a fan
fails and aminor alarm and amajor alarm are triggered when a fan tray is removed.
• To display the status of the cooling system, issue the show chassis environment
command. The output is similar to the following:
user@switch> show chassis environmentClass Item Status MeasurementTemp PEM 0 OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F PEM 1 OK 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F PEM 2 Check PEM 3 Absent Routing Engine 0 OK 31 degrees C / 87 degrees F Routing Engine 0 CPU OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F Routing Engine 1 OK 33 degrees C / 91 degrees F Routing Engine 1 CPU OK 31 degrees C / 87 degrees F CB 0 Intake OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F CB 0 Exhaust A OK 29 degrees C / 84 degrees F CB 0 Exhaust B OK 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F CB 0 ACBC OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F CB 0 XF A OK 50 degrees C / 122 degrees F CB 0 XF B OK 46 degrees C / 114 degrees F CB 1 Intake OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F CB 1 Exhaust A OK 29 degrees C / 84 degrees F CB 1 Exhaust B OK 37 degrees C / 98 degrees F CB 1 ACBC OK 33 degrees C / 91 degrees F CB 1 XF A OK 50 degrees C / 122 degrees F CB 1 XF B OK 46 degrees C / 114 degrees F FPC 0 Intake OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F FPC 0 Exhaust A OK 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F FPC 0 Exhaust B OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F FPC 0 LU 0 TCAM TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 0 LU 0 TCAM Chip OK 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F FPC 0 LU 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 0 LU 0 Chip OK 52 degrees C / 125 degrees F FPC 0 MQ 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 0 MQ 0 Chip OK 49 degrees C / 120 degrees F FPC 1 Intake OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F FPC 1 Exhaust A OK 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F FPC 1 Exhaust B OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F FPC 1 LU 0 TCAM TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 1 LU 0 TCAM Chip OK 41 degrees C / 105 degrees F FPC 1 LU 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 1 LU 0 Chip OK 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F FPC 1 MQ 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 1 MQ 0 Chip OK 46 degrees C / 114 degrees F
217Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
FPC 2 Intake OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F FPC 2 Exhaust A OK 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F FPC 2 Exhaust B OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F FPC 2 LU 0 TCAM TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 2 LU 0 TCAM Chip OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 2 LU 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 2 LU 0 Chip OK 52 degrees C / 125 degrees F FPC 2 MQ 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 2 MQ 0 Chip OK 45 degrees C / 113 degrees F FPC 3 Intake OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F FPC 3 Exhaust A OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F FPC 3 Exhaust B OK 33 degrees C / 91 degrees F FPC 3 LU 0 TCAM TSen OK 39 degrees C / 102 degrees F FPC 3 LU 0 TCAM Chip OK 41 degrees C / 105 degrees F FPC 3 LU 0 TSen OK 39 degrees C / 102 degrees F FPC 3 LU 0 Chip OK 48 degrees C / 118 degrees F FPC 3 MQ 0 TSen OK 39 degrees C / 102 degrees F FPC 3 MQ 0 Chip OK 46 degrees C / 114 degrees F FPC 4 Intake OK 30 degrees C / 86 degrees F FPC 4 Exhaust A OK 36 degrees C / 96 degrees F FPC 4 Exhaust B OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F FPC 4 LU 0 TCAM TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 4 LU 0 TCAM Chip OK 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F FPC 4 LU 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 4 LU 0 Chip OK 51 degrees C / 123 degrees F FPC 4 MQ 0 TSen OK 40 degrees C / 104 degrees F FPC 4 MQ 0 Chip OK 46 degrees C / 114 degrees F FPC 5 Intake OK 31 degrees C / 87 degrees F FPC 5 Exhaust A OK 35 degrees C / 95 degrees F FPC 5 Exhaust B OK 34 degrees C / 93 degrees F FPC 5 LU 0 TCAM TSen OK 41 degrees C / 105 degrees F FPC 5 LU 0 TCAM Chip OK 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F FPC 5 LU 0 TSen OK 41 degrees C / 105 degrees F FPC 5 LU 0 Chip OK 54 degrees C / 129 degrees F FPC 5 MQ 0 TSen OK 41 degrees C / 105 degrees F FPC 5 MQ 0 Chip OK 44 degrees C / 111 degrees FFans Top Rear Fan OK Spinning at normal speed Bottom Rear Fan OK Spinning at normal speed Top Middle Fan OK Spinning at normal speed Bottom Middle Fan OK Spinning at normal speed Top Front Fan OK Spinning at normal speed Bottom Front Fan OK Spinning at normal speed
The output is of an EX9208 switch. The output is similar for all EX9200 switches.
RelatedDocumentation
Routine Maintenance Procedures for EX9200 Switches on page 213•
• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch on page 141
Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches
Components in the line cards are fragile. To avoid damaging the line cards, follow the
procedures in this topic. The procedures use the following terms to describe the four
edges of the line cards (see Figure 71 on page 219):
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.218
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 71: Edges of the Line Cards
• Faceplate—Edge of the line card that has connectors into which you insert the
transceivers or RJ-45 cables.
• Connector edge—Edge opposite the faceplate.
• Top edge—Edge at the top of the line card when the line card is vertical.
• Bottom edge—Edge at the bottom of the line card when the line card is vertical.
CAUTION: Failure to handle line cards as specified in these procedures cancause irreparable damage to them.
This topic describes the following tasks:
• Holding a Line Card on page 219
• Storing a Line Card on page 221
Holding a Line Card
Youmust hold a line card horizontally when installing it in the chassis. Youmay hold a
line card vertically or horizontally when carrying it.
CAUTION: The weight of line cards in EX9200 switches is in the range14–19.4 lb (6.6–8.8 kg). Be prepared to support the full weight as you slidethe line card into the chassis.
To hold a line card vertically:
1. Orient the line card so that the faceplate faces you. To verify the orientation, confirm
that the text on the line card is right-side up.
2. Place one hand around the line card faceplate about a quarter of the way down from
the top edge. Do not press hard on it.
3. Place the other hand at the bottom edge of the line card.
If the line card is horizontal before you grasp it, place your left hand around the faceplate
and your right hand along the bottom edge.
To hold a line card horizontally:
219Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
1. Orient the line card so that the faceplate faces you.
2. Grasp the top edge with your left hand and the bottom edge with your right hand.
You can rest the faceplate of the line card against your body as you carry it.
CAUTION: Take care not to hit the line card against any object as you carryit. Line card components are fragile.
Never hold or grasp the line card anywhere except the placesmentioned inthese procedures. In particular, never grasp the connector edge. SeeFigure 72 on page 220.
Figure 72: Do Not Grasp the Connector Edge
Never carry the line card while holding the faceplate with only one hand.
Do not rest any edge of a line card directly against a hard surface. SeeFigure 73 on page 221.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.220
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 73: Do Not Rest the Edge of a Line Card on a Hard Surface
If youmust rest a line card temporarily on an edge, place a cushion betweenthe edge and the surface.
Do not stack line cards on top of one another or on top of any othercomponent. Place each line card separately in an antistatic bag or on anantistatic mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
Storing a Line Card
Youmust store a line card in the chassis or in a spare shipping container, horizontally and
sheet metal side down. Do not stack line cards on top of one another or on top of any
other component. Place each line card separately in an antistatic bag or on an antistatic
mat placed on a flat, stable surface.
NOTE: Because a line card is heavy, and because antistatic bags are fragile,inserting the line card into the bag is best done with two people, each to doone of the following steps.
To insert a line card into an antistatic bag:
1. Hold the line card in the horizontal position with the faceplate facing you.
2. Slide the opening of the bag over the line card connector edge.
221Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
If you must insert the line card into a bag by yourself:
1. Lay the line card horizontally on a flat, stable surface, sheet metal side down.
2. Orient the line card with the faceplate facing you.
3. Carefully insert the line card connector edge into the opening of the bag and pull the
bag toward you to cover the line card.
RelatedDocumentation
Maintaining Line Card Cables in EX9200 Switches on page 222•
• Installing a Line Card in an EX9200 Switch on page 152
• Removing a Line Card from an EX9200 Switch on page 204
• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249
Maintaining Line Card Cables in EX9200 Switches
Components in the line cards are fragile. To extend the lives of your line card cables and
to avoid problems that can result from cable damage, follow these procedures:
Tomaintain line card cables in switches:
• Place excess cable out of the way. Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle
from the connector. Placing fasteners on the loops helps retain their shape.
• Keep thecable connections cleanand freeof dust andother particles,which cancause
drops in the received power level. Always inspect cables and clean them if necessary
before connecting an interface.
• Label both ends of line card cables to identify them.
RelatedDocumentation
Handling and Storing Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 218•
• Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in Switches on page 223
Maintaining Power Supplies in EX9200 Switches
Purpose For optimum switch performance, verify the condition of the installed power supplies.
Action On a regular basis:
• Check the status of the power supplies by issuing the show chassis environment pem
command. The output is similar to the following:
user@switch> show chassis environment pemPEM 0 status: State Online Temperature OK DC Output Voltage(V) Current(A) Power(W) Load(%) 48 12 576 36PEM 1 status: State Online Temperature OK
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.222
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
DC Output Voltage(V) Current(A) Power(W) Load(%) 50 12 600 37
• Make sure that the power and grounding cables are arranged so that they do not
obstruct access to other switch components.
• Routinely check the status LEDson thepower supply faceplates and the craft interface
to determine whether the power supplies are functioning normally.
• Check the major andminor alarm LEDs on the craft interface. Power supply failure or
removal triggers an alarm that causes one or both of the LEDs to light. You can display
the associated error messages by issuing the following command:
user@switch> show chassis alarms
• Periodically inspect the site to ensure that the grounding and power cables connected
to the switch are securely in place and that there is nomoisture accumulating near the
switch.
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Maintaining Fiber-Optic Cables in Switches
Fiber-optic cables connect to optical transceivers that are installed in EXSeries switches
and OCX1100 switches.
Tomaintain fiber-optic cables:
• When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a transceiver, place rubber safety caps over
the transceiver and on the end of the cable.
• Anchor fiber-optic cables to prevent stress on the connectors. When attaching a
fiber-optic cable to a transceiver, be sure to secure the fiber-optic cable so that it is
not supporting its ownweight as it hangs to the floor. Never let a fiber-optic cable hang
free from the connector.
• Avoidbending fiber-opticcablesbeyondtheirminimumbend radius.Bending fiber-optic
cables into arcs smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cables and
cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
• Frequentpluggingandunpluggingof fiber-optic cables inandoutofoptical instruments
can damage the instruments, which are expensive to repair. Attach a short fiber
extension to the optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and
unplugging is then absorbed by the short fiber extension, which is easier and less
expensive to replace than the instruments.
• Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean. Micro-deposits of oil and dust in the canal
of the transceiver or cable connector can cause loss of light, reduction in signal power,
and possibly intermittent problems with the optical connection.
223Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 14: Routine Maintenance
• To clean the transceiver canal, use an appropriate fiber-cleaning device such as
RIFOCSFiberOpticAdaptorCleaningWands(partnumber946).Followthedirections
in the cleaning kit you use.
• After cleaning the transceiver, make sure that the connector tip of the fiber-optic
cable is clean. Use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic cable cleaning kit such
as the Opptex Cletop-S®
Fiber Cleaner. Follow the directions in the cleaning kit you
use.
RelatedDocumentation
• Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to a Switch on page 156
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches on page 257
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on OCX1100 Switches
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.224
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 6
Troubleshooting Switch Components
• Troubleshooting Switch Components on page 227
225Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.226
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 15
Troubleshooting Switch Components
• Troubleshooting the Cooling System in an EX9200 Switch on page 227
• Troubleshooting Power Supplies in an EX9200 Switch on page 228
• Troubleshooting Line Cards in EX9200 Switches on page 229
Troubleshooting the Cooling System in an EX9200 Switch
Problem Description: The fans in the fan tray are not functioning normally.
Solution Follow these guidelines to troubleshoot the fans:
• Check the fan LEDs and alarm LEDs on the craft interface.
If themajor alarmLEDon thecraft interfaceglows, use theCLI toget informationabout
the source of an alarm condition:
user@switch> show chassis alarms
If the CLI output lists only one fan failure and the other fans are functioning normally,
the fan is most likely faulty and youmust replace the fan tray.
• Place your handnear the exhaust vents at the side of the chassis to determinewhether
the fans are pushing air out of the chassis.
• If a fan tray is removed, both aminor alarm and amajor alarm occur.
• The following conditions automatically cause the fans to run at full speed and also
trigger the indicated alarm:
• A fan fails (major alarm).
• The switch temperature exceeds the temperature warm threshold (minor alarm).
• The temperature of the switch exceeds the temperature hot threshold (major alarm
and automatic shutdown of the power supplies).
RelatedDocumentation
Maintaining the Air Filter in EX9200 Switches on page 216•
• Maintaining the Fan Tray in EX9200 Switches on page 217
• Installing a Fan Tray in an EX9200 Switch on page 141
227Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Troubleshooting Power Supplies in an EX9200 Switch
Problem Description: The power system is not functioning normally.
Solution Check the LEDs on each power supply faceplate.•
• If an AC power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the ACOK and
DCOK LEDs light steadily, and the PS FAIL LED is not lit.
• If a DC power supply is correctly installed and functioning normally, the PWROK,
BRKRON, and INPUTOK LEDs glow steady green.
• Issue the CLI showchassis environment pem command to check the status of installed
power supplies. As shown in the sample output, the valueOnline in the rows labeled
Statemust indicate that each of the power supplies is functioning normally:
user@switch> show chassis environment pemPEM 0 status: State Online Temperature OK DC Output Voltage(V) Current(A) Power(W) Load(%) 48 12 576 36PEM 1 status: State Online Temperature OK DC Output Voltage(V) Current(A) Power(W) Load(%) 50 12 600 37
The output is of an EX9208 switch. The output is similar for all EX9200 switches.
If a power supply is not functioning normally, perform the following steps to diagnose
and correct the problem:
• If amajor alarmconditionoccurs, issue the showchassisalarmscommand todetermine
the source of the problem.
• If all power supplies have failed, the system temperature might have exceeded the
threshold, causing the system to shut down.
NOTE: If the system temperature exceeds the threshold, Junos OS shutsdown all power supplies so that no status is displayed.
Junos OS also can shut down one of the power supplies for other reasons.In this case, the remaining power supplies provide power to the switch ,and you can still view the system status through the CLI or display.
• Check that the DC circuit breaker (—) or AC input switch (|) is in the on position and
that the power supply is receiving power.
• Verify that the source circuit breaker has the proper current rating. Each power supply
must be connected to a separate source circuit breaker.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.228
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Verify that the AC power cord or DC power cables from the power source to the switch
are not damaged. If the insulation is cracked or broken, immediately replace the cord
or cable.
• Connect the power supply to a different power sourcewith a newpower cord or power
cables. If the power supply status LEDs indicate that the power supply is not operating
normally, the power supply is the source of the problem. Replace the power supply
with a spare.
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Troubleshooting Line Cards in EX9200 Switches
Problem Description: Line card is not functioning normally.
Solution • Monitor the LED labeledOK on the craft interface as soon as a line card is seated in an
operating switch.
The Routing Engine downloads the line card software to it under two conditions: the
line card is present when the Routing Engine boots Junos OS, and the line card is
installed and requested online through the CLI or the button on the front panel. The
line card then runs diagnostics, during which theOK LED blinks. When the line card is
online and functioning normally, theOK LED is lit green steadily.
• Make sure the line card is properly seated in the midplane. Check that each ejector
handle has been turned clockwise and is tight.
• Check theOK/FAIL LED on the line card andOK and FAIL line card LEDs on the craft
interface.When the line card is online and functioning normally, theOK LED is lit green
steadily.
• Issue the show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed line cards. As
shown in the sample output, the valueOnline in the column labeled State indicates
that the line card is functioning normally:
user@switch> show chassis fpc Temp CPU Utilization (%) Memory Utilization (%)Slot State (C) Total Interrupt DRAM (MB) Heap Buffer 0 Online 30 8 0 2048 24 14 1 Online 30 9 0 2048 14 14 2 Online 30 7 0 2048 14 14 3 Online 30 10 0 2048 14 14 4 Online 30 9 0 2048 15 14 5 Online 31 10 0 2048 15 14
NOTE: Theshowchassis fpccommanddisplays thestatusof the linecards.
229Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 15: Troubleshooting Switch Components
Formoredetailedoutput, add thedetailoption. The followingexampledoesnot specify
a slot number, which is optional:
user@switch> show chassis fpc detailSlot 0 information: State Online Temperature 30 Total CPU DRAM 2048 MB Total RLDRAM 331 MB Total DDR DRAM 1536 MB Start time: 2013-02-22 22:29:57 PST Uptime: 2 days, 3 hours, 48 minutes, 56 seconds
Max Power Consumption 239 WattsSlot 1 information: State Online Temperature 30 Total CPU DRAM 2048 MB Total RLDRAM 331 MB Total DDR DRAM 1536 MB Start time: 2013-02-22 22:30:01 PST Uptime: 2 days, 3 hours, 48 minutes, 52 seconds
Max Power Consumption 239 WattsSlot 2 information: State Online Temperature 30 Total CPU DRAM 2048 MB Total RLDRAM 331 MB Total DDR DRAM 1536 MB Start time: 2013-02-22 22:30:04 PST Uptime: 2 days, 3 hours, 48 minutes, 49 seconds
Max Power Consumption 239 WattsSlot 3 information: State Online Temperature 30 Total CPU DRAM 2048 MB Total RLDRAM 331 MB Total DDR DRAM 1536 MB Start time: 2013-02-22 22:30:08 PST Uptime: 2 days, 3 hours, 48 minutes, 45 seconds
Max Power Consumption 239 WattsSlot 4 information: State Online Temperature 30 Total CPU DRAM 2048 MB Total RLDRAM 331 MB Total DDR DRAM 1536 MB Start time: 2013-02-22 22:30:10 PST Uptime: 2 days, 3 hours, 48 minutes, 43 seconds
Max Power Consumption 239 WattsSlot 5 information: State Online Temperature 31 Total CPU DRAM 2048 MB Total RLDRAM 331 MB Total DDR DRAM 1536 MB Start time: 2013-02-22 22:30:16 PST
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.230
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Uptime: 2 days, 3 hours, 48 minutes, 37 seconds
Max Power Consumption 239 Watts
RelatedDocumentation
• Line Card Model and Version Compatibility in an EX9200 Switch on page 35
231Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 15: Troubleshooting Switch Components
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.232
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 7
Returning Hardware
• Returning the Switch or Switch Components on page 235
233Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.234
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 16
Returning the Switch or SwitchComponents
• Returning an EX9200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 235
• Locating the Serial Number on an EX9208 Switch or Component on page 236
• Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series
Switches on page 242
• Packing an EX9200 Switch or Component on page 244
Returning an EX9200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
If you need to return a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, follow this procedure:
1. Determine the serial number of the chassis if youneed to return the switch. If youneed
to return one ormore components, determine the serial number for each component.
For instructions, see Locating the Serial Number on an EX9204 Switch or Component,
“Locating the Serial Number on an EX9208 Switch or Component” on page 236, or
Locating the Serial Number on an EX9214 Switch or Component.
2. Obtain an RMA number from JTAC as described in “Contacting Customer Support to
Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches” on page 242.
NOTE: Donot return any component to JuniperNetworks unless youhavefirst obtained an RMA number. Juniper Networks reserves the right torefuse shipments that do not have an RMA. Refused shipments arereturned to the customer through collect freight.
3. Pack theswitchor component for shippingasdescribed in “PackinganEX9200Switch
or Component” on page 244.
Formore information about return and repair policies, see the customer support page at
http://www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html .
RelatedDocumentation
EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview•
• EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3
235Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
• EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview
Locating the Serial Number on an EX9208 Switch or Component
If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, youmust locate the serial number of the switch or component. Youmust
provide the serial number to the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC)
whenyoucontact themtoobtainReturnMaterialsAuthorization (RMA).See “Contacting
Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches” on
page 242.
If the switch is operational and you can access the command-line interface (CLI), you
can list serial numbers for the switch and for some components with a CLI command. If
you do not have access to the CLI or if the serial number for the component does not
appear in the commandoutput, you can locate the serial number ID label on the physical
switch or component.
NOTE: If youwant to findtheserialnumberonthephysicalswitchcomponent,you will need to remove the component from the switch chassis, for whichyoumust have the required parts and tools available. See “Installing andRemoving EX9208 Switch Hardware Components” on page 135.
1. Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI on page 236
2. Locating the Serial Number ID Label on an EX9200 Switch Chassis on page 238
3. Locating Serial Number ID Labels on FRU Components on page 239
Listing the Switch and Components Details with the CLI
To list the switch and switch components and their serial numbers, use the showchassis
hardware CLI command:
The following output lists the switch components and serial numbers for an EX9208
switch:
user@switch> show chassis hardwareHardware inventory:Item Version Part number Serial number DescriptionChassis JN120AAEERFB EX9208Midplane REV 05 710-017414 ACAX0183 EX9208-BPFPM Board REV 02 710-017254 CAAN4584 Front Panel DisplayPEM 0 Rev 03 740-022697 QCS1229C00F PS 1.2-1.7kW; 100-240V AC inPEM 1 Rev 03 740-022697 QCS1229C00T PS 1.2-1.7kW; 100-240V AC inPEM 2 Rev 03 740-022697 QCS1229C06J PS 1.2-1.7kW; 100-240V AC inRouting Engine 0 REV 07 740-031116 9009114067 RE-S-EX9200-1800X4Routing Engine 1 REV 07 740-031116 9009118544 RE-S-EX9200-1800X4CB 0 REV 15 750-031391 CAAT6718 EX9200-SCBECB 1 REV 15 750-031391 CAAT6562 EX9200-SCBEFPC 0 REV 10 710-013699 CAAN3523 EX9200 40x1G Copper
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.236
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CPU REV 04 711-038484 CAAL7616 MPCE PMB 2G MIC 0 REV 15 750-028390 CAAM7850 3D 40x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 1 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 2 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 3 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45FPC 1 REV 08 710-013699 CAAK1684 EX9200-40x1G-SFP CPU REV 04 711-038484 CAAK7874 MPCE PMB 2G MIC 0 REV 26 750-028392 CAAR8623 3D 20x 1GE(LAN) SFP PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 C073096 SFP-T Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 C073186 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 C074505 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 A430631 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 C074224 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 C075093 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 C074246 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 C074538 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 C222865 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-013111 C075105 SFP-T PIC 1 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 C070599 SFP-T Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 C074392 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 C071908 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 C075090 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 C070640 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 C074929 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 A430759 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 C074337 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 C075096 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-013111 C074303 SFP-TFPC 2 REV 10 710-013699 CAAM2323 EX9200-40x1G-SFP CPU REV 04 711-038484 CAAN4287 MPCE PMB 2G MIC 0 REV 26 750-028392 CAAR8305 3D 20x 1GE(LAN) SFP PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 A430831 SFP-T Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 C075100 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 C074525 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 C075158 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 C074209 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 C222303 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 C074225 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 A431203 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 C074558 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-013111 A431178 SFP-T PIC 1 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 A430800 SFP-T Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 C074354 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 C073948 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 C071967 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 C074208 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 C074709 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 C073150 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 C075106 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 C073953 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-013111 8512252 SFP-TFPC 3 REV 10 750-038489 CAAM2342 EX9200-40x1G-SFP CPU REV 04 711-038484 CAAN4157 MPCE PMB 2G MIC 0 REV 26 750-028392 CAAR8666 3D 20x 1GE(LAN) SFP PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 C074418 SFP-T
237Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 A431151 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 C073957 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 C073920 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 A430809 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 C074949 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 C074911 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 C075092 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 C075181 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-013111 C075071 SFP-T PIC 1 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 C075019 SFP-T Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 A434447 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 A430280 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 C070861 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 A430732 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 A431229 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 B388861 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 C222819 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 9332952 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-013111 A430234 SFP-TFPC 4 REV 10 710-013699 CAAM2337 EX9200-40x1G-SFP CPU REV 04 711-038484 CAAN4153 MPCE PMB 2G MIC 0 REV 15 750-028390 CAAH1550 3D 40x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 0 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 1 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 2 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45 PIC 3 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) RJ45FPC 5 REV 10 710-013699 CAAM2335 EX9200-40x1G-SFP CPU REV 04 711-038484 CAAN4293 MPCE PMB 2G MIC 1 REV 26 750-028392 CAAR8483 3D 20x 1GE(LAN) SFP PIC 2 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 C074218 SFP-T Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 B041352 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 C074523 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 A431001 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 C074987 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 C222844 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 C074994 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 C074339 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 C222894 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 01 740-013111 8511928 SFP-T PIC 3 BUILTIN BUILTIN 10x 1GE(LAN) SFP Xcvr 0 REV 02 740-013111 C070239 SFP-T Xcvr 1 REV 02 740-013111 C074438 SFP-T Xcvr 2 REV 02 740-013111 C074276 SFP-T Xcvr 3 REV 02 740-013111 C075173 SFP-T Xcvr 4 REV 02 740-013111 C074262 SFP-T Xcvr 5 REV 02 740-013111 C074536 SFP-T Xcvr 6 REV 02 740-013111 C074546 SFP-T Xcvr 7 REV 02 740-013111 C074573 SFP-T Xcvr 8 REV 02 740-013111 C073158 SFP-T Xcvr 9 REV 02 740-013111 C070783 SFP-TFan Tray Enhanced Left Fan Tray
Locating the Serial Number ID Label on an EX9200 Switch Chassis
The serial number ID label is located on the side of the chassis on an EX9208 switch.
See Figure 74 on page 239.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.238
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 74: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on EX9208 SwitchChassis
g022
017
ESD
Serial number ID label
Locating Serial Number ID Labels on FRU Components
The power supplies, fan tray, Routing Engine modules (REmodules), Switch Fabric
module (SFmodule), and line cards installed in an EX9200 switch are field-replaceable
units (FRUs). For each of these FRUs, youmust remove the FRU from the switch chassis
to see the FRU’s serial number ID label.
239Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
• ACPower supply—The serial number ID label is on the top of the AC power supply. See
Figure75onpage240.Alsosee“RemovinganACPowerSupply fromanEX9208Switch”
on page 193.
Figure 75: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on anACPower Supply
• DCPower supply—The serial number ID label is on the top of theDCpower supply (see
Figure 76 on page 240). Also see “Removing an AC Power Supply from an EX9208
Switch” on page 193.
Figure 76: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on a DC Power Supply
• SFmodule—The serial number is located on the right side of the top of the SFmodule
(see Figure 77 on page 241). See “Removing an SFModule froman EX9200Switch” on
page 202.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.240
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Figure 77: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the SFModule
g022
018
Serial numberID label
• Routing Engine module (REmodule)—The serial number label is located on the left
side of the top of the REmodule (see Figure 78 on page 241). See “Removing an RE
Module from an EX9200 Switch” on page 200.
Figure 78: Location of the Serial Number ID Label on the REModuleg0
2202
0
AAAA0000
Serial number ID label
RelatedDocumentation
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return Materials Authorization for EX Series
Switches on page 242
•
• Returning an EX9200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 235
241Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
Contacting Customer Support to Obtain ReturnMaterials Authorization for EX SeriesSwitches
If you are returning a switch or hardware component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) from Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC).
After locating the serial number of the switchor hardware component youwant to return,
open a Case with Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) on theWeb or
by telephone.
For instructions on locating the serial number of the switch or hardware component you
want to return:
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX2200 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX3200 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX3300 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX4200 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX4300 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX4500 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX4550 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX4600 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX6200 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX8200 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX9204 Switch or Component
• See “Locating the Serial Number on an EX9208 Switch or Component” on page 236
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EX9214 Switch or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an XRE200 External Routing Engine or Component
• See Locating the Serial Number on an EXSeries Redundant Power Systemor Redundant
Power System Components
Before you request an RMA from JTAC, be prepared to provide the following information:
• Your existing case number, if you have one
• Serial number of the component
• Your name, organization name, telephone number, fax number, and shipping address
• Details of the failure or problem
• Type of activity being performed on the switch when the problem occurred
• Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.242
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day, seven days a week on theWeb or by telephone:
• Case Manager at CSC: http://www.juniper.net/cm/
• Telephone: +1-888-314-JTAC1-888-314-5822, toll free in U.S., Canada, and Mexico
NOTE: For international or direct-dial options in countries without toll freenumbers, see http://www.juniper.net/support/requesting-support.html .
If you are contacting JTAC by telephone, enter your 11-digit case number followed by the
pound (#) key for an existing case, or press the star (*) key to be routed to the next
available support engineer.
The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return
of the component.
RelatedDocumentation
Packing an EX2200 Switch or Component for Shipping•
• Packing an EX3200 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX3300 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX4200 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX4300 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX4500 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX4550 Switch or Component for Shipping
• Packing an EX6200 Switch or Component
• Packing an EX8200 Switch or Component
• Packing an EX9200 Switch or Component on page 244
• PackinganEXSeriesRedundantPowerSystemorRedundantPowerSystemComponents
for Shipping
• Returning an EX2200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX3200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX3300 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX4200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX4300 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX4500 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX4550 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX6200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
• Returning an EX8200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement
243Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
• Returning an EX9200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 235
• Returning an EX Series RPS or RPS Component for Repair or Replacement
Packing an EX9200 Switch or Component
If you are returning an EX9200 switch or component to Juniper Networks for repair or
replacement, pack the item as described in this topic.
Before you begin packing the switch or component, ensure you have:
• Followed all the steps listed in “Contacting Customer Support to Obtain Return
Materials Authorization for EX Series Switches” on page 242.
• Retrieved the original shipping carton and packing materials. Contact your JTAC
representative if you do not have these materials, to learn about approved packing
materials. See “ContactingCustomerSupport toObtainReturnMaterialsAuthorization
for EX Series Switches” on page 242.
• Ensure you understand how to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) damage. See
“Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 280.
Ensure that you have the following parts and tools available:
• ESD grounding strap
This topic describes:
1. Packing an EX9200 Switch on page 244
2. Packing EX9200 Switch Components for Shipping on page 245
Packing an EX9200 Switch
If you need to transport the switch to another location or return the switch to Juniper
Networks, youneed topack theswitchsecurely in itsoriginalpackaging topreventdamage
during transportation.
To pack the switch for shipment:
1. Retrieve the shipping crate and packing materials in which the switch was originally
shipped. If you do not have these materials, contact your Juniper Networks
representative about approved packaging materials.
2. On theconsoleor othermanagementdevice connected to themasterRoutingEngine,
enterCLIoperationalmodeand issue the followingcommandtoshutdowntheswitch
software. (If two Routing Engine modules are installed, also issue the command on
the backup Routing Engine.)
user@switch> request system halt
Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
has halted.
For more information about the command, see the CLI Explorer.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.244
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
3. Attach an ESD grounding strap to your barewrist, and connect the strap to one of the
ESD points on the chassis.
4. Shut down power to the switch by pressing the AC input switch or DC circuit breaker
for all power supplies to the Off (O) position.
5. Disconnect power from the switch.
6. Remove the cables that connect to all external devices.
7. Remove all field replaceable units (FRUs) from the switch.
8. Remove the switch from the rack:
• If you are using amechanical lift, place the lift platform under the switch, unscrew
and remove themounting screws fromthe rack, andmove the switch to the shipping
crate.
• If you are not using amechanical lift and the switch weight is fully supported by a
shelf or another switch, unscrew and remove themounting screws from the rack.
Three people can then lift the switch andmove it to the shipping crate.
• If you are not using amechanical lift and the switch weight is not fully supported
by a shelf or another switch, three people must grasp the switch while a fourth
personunscrewsand removes themounting screws fromthe rack. The threepeople
can thenmove the switch to the shipping container.
9. Place the switch in the shipping crate or onto the pallet. If on a pallet, bolt the switch
to the pallet.
10. Cover the switch with an antistatic bag and place the packing foam on top of and
around the switch.
11. Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam.
12. Securely tape the box closed or place the crate cover over the switch.
13. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
Packing EX9200 Switch Components for Shipping
To pack EX9200 switch components, follow the instructions here.
Before you begin packing a switch component, ensure that you have the following parts
and tools available:
• Antistatic bag, one for each component
• ESD grounding strap
CAUTION: Do not stack switch components. Return individual componentsin separate boxes if they do not fit together on one level in the shipping box.
To pack EX9200 switch components:
245Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 16: Returning the Switch or Switch Components
• Place individual components in antistatic bags.
• Use the original packingmaterials if they are available. If the original packingmaterials
are not available, ensure the component is adequately packed to prevent damage
during transit. The packingmaterial you usemust be able to support the weight of the
component.
• Ensure that the components are adequately protected by wrapping themwell with
packing materials. Pack the component in an oversized box (if the original box is not
available) with extra packing material around the unit so that the component is
prevented frommoving around inside the box.
• Securely tape the box closed.
• Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.
RelatedDocumentation
Returning an EX9200 Switch or Component for Repair or Replacement on page 235•
• Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX9204 Switch
• Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX9208 Switch on page 123
• Parts Inventory (Packing List) for an EX9214 Switch
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.246
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 8
Safety Information
• General Safety Information on page 249
• Radiation and Laser Warnings on page 257
• Installation and Maintenance Safety Information on page 263
• Power and Electrical Safety Information on page 279
247Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.248
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 17
General Safety Information
• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249
• Definitions of SafetyWarning Levels on page 250
• Fire Safety Requirements on page 252
• Qualified Personnel Warning on page 253
• Restricted Access AreaWarning on page 254
• Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 256
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the device from damage.
The list of guidelinesmightnotaddressall potentially hazardoussituations in yourworking
environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times.
• Perform only the procedures explicitly described in the hardware documentation for
this device. Make sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system
services.
• Keep the area around the device clear and free from dust before, during, and after
installation.
• Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over themwhile walking.
• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could
become caught in the device.
• Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous
to your eyes.
• Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the
equipment unsafe.
• Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.
• Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.
249Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
• Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed
for wet environments.
• Operate the device only when it is properly grounded.
• Ensure that the separate protective earthing terminal provided on this device is
permanently connected to earth.
• Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.
• Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet-metal parts unless instructions are
provided in the hardware documentation for this device. Such an action could cause
severe electrical shock.
• Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an
action could result in electrical shock or fire.
• Avoid spilling liquid onto the chassis or onto any device component. Such an action
could cause electrical shock or damage the device.
• Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been
disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
• Always ensure that all modules, power supplies, and cover panels are fully inserted
and that the installation screws are fully tightened.
RelatedDocumentation
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282•
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 272
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
Definitions of SafetyWarning Levels
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Thedocumentationuses the following levels of safetywarnings (thereare two “Warning”
formats):
NOTE: Youmight find this information helpful in a particular situation, or youmight overlook this important information if it was not highlighted in a Note.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.250
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to prevent minorinjury or discomfort to you or severe damage to the device.
WARNING: This symbol alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.
WARNING: This symbolmeansdanger.Youare inasituation thatcouldcausebodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazardsinvolved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices forpreventing accidents.
Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert ineen situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enigeapparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrischeschakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u opde hoogte te zijn van standaardmaatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.
Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voijohtaa ruumiinvammaan.Ennenkuin työskenteletminkään laitteistonparissa,ota selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisistaonnettomuuksien ehkäisykeinoista.
AttentionCe symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvezdansunesituationpouvantcauserdesblessuresoudesdommagescorporels.Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers poséspar les circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédurescouramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents.
Warnung DiesesWarnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einerSituation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit derArbeit an irgendeinemGerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischenStromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zurVermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.
AvvertenzaQuesto simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazionepotrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasiapparecchiatura, occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici edessere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.
AdvarselDette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon somkan føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vareoppmerksom på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samtgjøre deg kjent med vanlig praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.
Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação quelhepoderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar comqualquerequipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos
251Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 17: General Safety Information
eléctricos, e com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveisacidentes.
¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para suintegridad física. Antes demanipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgosque entraña la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientosestándar de prevención de accidentes.
Varning!Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situationsom kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustningmåste du varamedveten om farornamed elkretsar och känna till vanligtförfarande för att förebygga skador.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 272
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches on page 257
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series
• Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 256
Fire Safety Requirements
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
In the event of a fire emergency involving switches and other network equipment, the
safety of people is the primary concern. You should establish procedures for protecting
people in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly provision
fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.
In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a
fire emergency. JuniperNetworksproducts shouldbe installed inanenvironment suitable
for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available
in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire, safety, and
electrical codesandordinancesbeobservedwhenyou install andoperateyourequipment.
Fire Suppression
In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to
theequipmentat the source. ThenuseaTypeC fire extinguisher,whichusesnoncorrosive
fire retardants, to extinguish the fire.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.252
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Fire Suppression Equipment
Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide
andHalotron™,aremosteffective for suppressingelectrical fires. TypeC fire extinguishers
displace oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For extinguishing fire
on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling, you should use
this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leaves
residues on equipment.
Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire
extinguishers). The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium
phosphate,which is very sticky anddifficult to clean. In addition, in thepresenceofminute
amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and
corrodes most metals.
Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is
subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to
be irreparably damaged.
NOTE: Tokeepwarrantieseffective,donotuseadrychemical fireextinguisherto control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks switch or other network deviceprovided by Juniper. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used, the unit is nolonger eligible for coverage under a service agreement.
We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an
environmentally responsible manner.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• Action to Take After an Electrical Accident on page 294
Qualified PersonnelWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Only trainedandqualified personnel should install or replace thedevice.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind enbevoegd personeel uitgevoerd worden.
VaroitusAinoastaankoulutettu japätevähenkilökuntasaaasentaatai vaihtaatämän laitteen.
253Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 17: General Safety Information
Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisépar du personnel qualifié et compétent.
WarnungGerät nur vongeschultem, qualifiziertemPersonal installierenoderauswechseln lassen.
Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzatoad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio.
Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere ellerbytte ut dette utstyret.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas porpessoal devidamente treinado e qualificado.
¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazadosexclusivamenteporpersonal técnicoadecuadamentepreparadoycapacitado.
Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildadoch kvalificerad personal.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
Restricted Access AreaWarning
WARNING: The hardware equipment is intended for installation in restrictedaccess areas. A restricted access area is an area to which access can begained only by service personnel through the use of a special tool, lock andkey, or other means of security, and which is controlled by the authorityresponsible for the location.
WaarschuwingDit toestel isbedoeldvoor installatieopplaatsenmetbeperktetoegang.Eenplaatsmetbeperkte toegang iseenplaatswaar toegangslechtsdoor servicepersoneel verkregen kan worden door middel van een speciaalinstrument, een slot en sleutel, of een ander veiligheidsmiddel, en welkebeheerd wordt door de overheidsinstantie die verantwoordelijk is voor delocatie.
Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy onrajoitettua. Paikka, johon pääsy on rajoitettua, tarkoittaa paikkaa, johon vainhuoltohenkilöstö pääsee jonkin erikoistyökalun, lukkoon sopivan avaimentai jonkin muun turvalaitteen avulla ja joka on paikasta vastuussa olevientoimivaltaisten henkilöiden valvoma.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.254
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Attention Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d'accès réservé. Cesdernières sontdeszonesauxquelles seul lepersonneldeservicepeutaccéderen utilisant un outil spécial, unmécanisme de verrouillage et une clé, ou toutautre moyen de sécurité. L'accès aux zones de sécurité est sous le contrôlede l'autorité responsable de l'emplacement.
Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichenmit beschränktemZutritt vorgesehen. Ein Bereichmit beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zudem nurWartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs, Schloß undSchlüssel oder anderer Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat, und der vondem für die Anlage zuständigen Gremium kontrolliert wird.
AvvertenzaQuestaunitàdeveessere installata inun'areaadaccesso limitato.Un'area ad accesso limitato è un'area accessibile solo a personale diassistenza tramite un'attrezzo speciale, lucchetto, o altri dispositivi disicurezza, ed è controllata dall'autorità responsabile della zona.
Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i områder med begrensetadgang.Etområdemedbegrensetadganggir kunadgangtil servicepersonalesom bruker et spesielt verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller en annensikkerhetsanordning, og det kontrolleres av den autoriteten som er ansvarligfor området.
AvisoEstaunidade foi concebidapara instalaçãoemáreasdeacesso restrito.Uma área de acesso restrito é uma área à qual apenas temacesso o pessoalde serviço autorizado, que possua uma ferramenta, chave e fechaduraespecial, ou qualquer outra forma de segurança. Esta área é controlada pelaautoridade responsável pelo local.
¡Atención! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalarse en áreas de accesorestringido. Área de acceso restringido significa un área a la que solamentetieneaccesoelpersonaldeserviciomediante lautilizacióndeunaherramientaespecial, cerradura con llave, o algún otromedio de seguridad, y que estábajo el control de la autoridad responsable del local.
Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områdenmed begränsattillträde. Ett områdemed begränsat tillträde får endast tillträdas avservicepersonal med ett speciellt verktyg, lås och nyckel, eller annansäkerhetsanordning, och kontrolleras av den auktoritet som ansvarar förområdet.
RelatedDocumentation
Installation Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices•
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices
• General Electrical Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices
• DC Power Electrical Safety Warnings for Juniper Networks Devices
255Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 17: General Safety Information
Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: The equipmentmust be connected to an earthedmainssocket-outlet.
Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt.
Varning! Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat nätuttag.
RelatedDocumentation
• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.256
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 18
Radiation and Laser Warnings
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches on page 257
• Radiation fromOpen Port AperturesWarning on page 260
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches
EX Series switches, OCX1100 switches, and the XRE200 External Routing Engine are
equipped with laser transmitters, which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the
U.S. Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per EN
60825-1 requirements.
Observe the following guidelines and warnings:
• General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 257
• Class 1 Laser ProductWarning on page 258
• Class 1 LED ProductWarning on page 258
• Laser BeamWarning on page 259
General Laser Safety Guidelines
When working around ports that support optical transceivers, observe the following
safety guidelines to prevent eye injury:
• Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.
• Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.
• Avoid direct exposure to the beam.
WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laserradiation. The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on theretina, so focusing the eye directly on a laser source—even a low-powerlaser—could permanently damage the eye.
257Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Class 1 Laser ProductWarning
WARNING: Class 1 laser product.
Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.
Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.
Attention Produit laser de classe I.
Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.
WARNING: Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.
Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.
Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.
¡Atención! Producto láser Clase I.
Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.
Class 1 LED ProductWarning
WARNING: Class 1 LED product.
Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.
Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.
Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.
Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.
WARNING: Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.
Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.
Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.
¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.
Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.258
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Laser BeamWarning
WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with opticalinstruments.
WARNING: WaarschuwingNiet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeksbekijkenmet optische instrumenten.
WARNING: VaroitusÄläkatsosäteeseenäläkätarkastelesitäsuoraanoptisenlaitteen avulla.
WARNING: AttentionNe pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observerdirectement à l'aide d'instruments optiques.
WARNING: WarnungNicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direktmit optischen Geräten prüfen.
WARNING: AvvertenzaNon fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumentiottici per osservarlo direttamente.
WARNING: Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlenmed optiskeinstrumenter.
WARNING: AvisoNão olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para eledirectamente com instrumentos ópticos.
WARNING: ¡Atención!Nomirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamentecon instrumentos ópticos.
WARNING: Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt påden genom optiska instrument.
259Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 18: Radiation and Laser Warnings
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• Radiation fromOpen Port AperturesWarning on page 260
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on EX Series Switches
• Pluggable Transceivers Supported on OCX1100 Switches
Radiation fromOpen Port AperturesWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Because invisible radiationmight be emitted from the apertureof the portwhen no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation anddo not stare into open apertures.
Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van depoort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstellingaan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden.
Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kunkuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katsoavoimiin aukkoihin.
Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture duport lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandéde ne pas regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.
Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren,wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich denStrahlungen auszusetzen, und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!
AvvertenzaQuando i cavi in fibranonsono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possonoessere emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alleradiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.
AdvarselUnngåutsettelse for stråling, ogstirr ikke inn i åpninger someråpne,fordi usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkobleten fiberkabel.
AvisoDadaapossibilidadedeemissãode radiação invisível atravésdoorifícioda via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado,deverá evitar a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente paraorifícios que se encontrarem a descoberto.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.260
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
¡Atención!Debidoaque laaperturadelpuertopuedeemitir radiación invisiblecuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evitemirar directamente a lasaperturas para no exponerse a la radiación.
Varning!Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan anslutenfiberkabel ochdubör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genomatt intestirra in i oskyddade öppningar.
RelatedDocumentation
• General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches on page 257
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series
261Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 18: Radiation and Laser Warnings
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.262
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 19
Installation and Maintenance SafetyInformation
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX9200 Switches on page 265
• RampWarning on page 266
• Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings on page 267
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
• Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 272
Installation InstructionsWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the deviceto a power source.
WaarschuwingRaadpleegde installatie-aanwijzingenvoordatuhetsysteemmet de voeding verbindt.
VaroitusLueasennusohjeetennen järjestelmänyhdistämistävirtalähteeseen.
AttentionAvantdebrancher lesystèmesur lasourced'alimentation,consulterles directives d'installation.
Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System andie Stromquelle anschließen.
AvvertenzaConsultare le istruzionidi installazioneprimadicollegare il sistemaall'alimentatore.
Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.
263Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fontede energia.
¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistemaa la red de alimentación.
Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dessströmförsörjningsenhet.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches on page 257
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
• Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX3300 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4300 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4550 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4600 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX6200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 169
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9214 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX2200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4300 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4500 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4600 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4550 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX6200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.264
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 173
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9214 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine
• Connecting DC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine
• Connecting AC Power to an OCX1100 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an OCX1100 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3100 Director Device
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device with Single-PhaseWiring
Trays
• ConnectingACPower toaQFX3008-I InterconnectDevicewithThree-PhaseDeltaWiring
Trays
• Connecting ACPower to aQFX3008-I Interconnect Devicewith Three-PhaseWyeWiring
Trays
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3500, QFX3600, or QFX3600-I Device
• Connecting DC Power to a QFX3500, QFX3600, or QFX3600-I Device
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX5100 Device
• Connecting DC Power to a QFX5100 Device
Chassis Lifting Guidelines for EX9200 Switches
Observe the following guidelines for lifting andmoving the switch:
• Beforemoving the switch toa site, ensure that the sitemeets thepower, environmental,
and clearance requirements.
• Do not attempt to lift the switch by yourself. We recommend using amechanical lift
to install the switch in a rack or cabinet. If you cannot use a lift, you must remove all
components from the chassis before lifting and use aminimum of three people to lift
the switch chassis.
WARNING: Because of the switch’s size and weight, we require the use ofamechanical lift to install the switch in a rack or cabinet or tomove theswitch from one location to another.
CAUTION: The switch chassis has two handles, one on each side of thechassis. Do not lift a fully loaded chassis by the handles; make sure thechassis is empty before you lift it. If two of the people lifting the chassisuse thehandles to lift it, a thirdpersonmust lift fromthe rearof thechassis.
265Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
The rear of the chassis is heavier than the front of the chassis, sowhen youlift the chassis by the handles, the chassis tips toward the heavier backend. The person lifting from the backmust be aware of this behavior andbe braced to prevent any injury and the chassis from tipping over.
• Before lifting or moving the switch, disconnect all external cables and wires.
• Do not grasp the switch by the blue panel at the top front of the chassis. Doing so can
cause the panel to detach from the switch.
• If you are lifting the switch, as when lifting any heavy object, ensure that most of the
weight is borne by your legs rather than your back. Keep your knees bent and your back
relatively straight. Do not twist your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly among
the people lifting the switch and be sure that your footing is firm.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129
RampWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: When installing the device, do not use a ramp inclined at morethan 10 degrees.
WaarschuwingGebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek vanmeer dan 10graden.
VaroitusÄläkäytäsellaistakaltevaapintaa, jonkakaltevuusylittää 10astetta.
AttentionNe pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10degrés.
WarnungKeine Rampenmit einer Neigung vonmehr als 10 Grad verwenden.
AvvertenzaNon usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.
Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.
AvisoNão utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.
¡Atención!No usar una rampa inclinadamás de 10 grados
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.266
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Varning! Använd inte rampmed en lutning påmer än 10 grader.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
Rack-Mounting and Cabinet-MountingWarnings
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Ensure that the rack or cabinet in which the device is installed is evenly and securely
supported. Unevenmechanical loading could lead to a hazardous condition.
WARNING: To prevent bodily injury whenmounting or servicing the devicein a rack, take the following precautions to ensure that the system remainsstable. The following directives helpmaintain your safety:
• The devicemust be installed in a rack that is secured to the buildingstructure.
• Thedevice should bemountedat thebottomof the rack if it is the only unitin the rack.
• Whenmounting the device on a partially filled rack, load the rack from thebottom to the topwith the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
• If the rack is provided with stabilizing equipment, install the stabilizersbeforemounting or servicing the device in the rack.
WaarschuwingOm lichamelijk letsel te voorkomenwanneer u dit toestel ineen rekmonteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u specialevoorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabielblijft. De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid teverzekeren:
• De Juniper Networks switchmoet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd dieaan een bouwsel is verankerd.
• Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd teworden als het toestelhet enige in het rek is.
267Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
• Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rekmonteert, dient u hetrekvanonderennaarboven te ladenmethet zwaarsteonderdeelonderaanin het rek.
• Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u destabilisatoren temonteren voordat u het toestel in het rekmonteert of hetdaar een servicebeurt geeft.
VaroitusKun laiteasetetaan telineeseen taihuolletaansenollessa telineessä,onnoudatettavaerityisiävarotoimia järjestelmänvakavuudensäilyttämiseksi,jotta vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:
• Juniper Networks switch on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitettyrakennukseen.
• Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.
• Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminensen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.
• Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamistatelineeseen tai sen huoltamista siinä.
Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations demontage ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre desprécautions spécialesafindemaintenir la stabilité du système. Lesdirectivesci-dessous sont destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:
• Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks switch doit être fixé à lastructure du bâtiment.
• Si cette unité constitue la seule unitémontéeencasier, elle doit êtreplacéedans le bas.
• Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger lecasier de bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.
• Si lecasier estéquipédedispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateursavant demonter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.
WarnungZurVermeidungvonKörperverletzungbeimAnbringenoderWartendieser Einheit in einemGestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen,um sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtliniensollen zur Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:
• Der Juniper Networks switchmuß in einemGestell installiert werden, dasin der Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.
• Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestellangebracht werden.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.268
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist dasGestell von unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil untenim Gestell anzubringen ist.
• Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst dieStabilisatoren zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringenoder sie warten.
AvvertenzaPerevitare infortuni fisici durante ilmontaggioo lamanutenzionedi questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni pergarantire che il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono forniteper garantire la sicurezza personale:
• Il Juniper Networks switch deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deveessere fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.
• Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si trattadell'unica unità damontare nel supporto.
• Quando questa unità vienemontata in un supporto parzialmente pieno,caricare il supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesantesistemato sul fondo del supporto.
• Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositiviprimadimontareodiprocedereallamanutenzionedell'unitànel supporto.
AdvarselUnngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid pådenne enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøyemed at systemeter stabilt. Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:
• Juniper Networks switchmå installeres i et stativ som er forankret tilbygningsstrukturen.
• Denne enheten børmonteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den enesteenheten i kabinettet.
• Vedmontering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skalkabinettet lastes frabunnenogoppmeddentyngstekomponentennedersti kabinettet.
• Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatoreneinstalleres før montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten ikabinettet.
Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais aomontar ou reparar estaunidade numaestante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificarde que o sistema possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizesajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu trabalho com segurança:
269Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
• O Juniper Networks switch deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa àestrutura do edificio.
• Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso sejaesta a única unidade a ser montada.
• Aomontar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque ositensmais pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixopara cima.
• Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes demontar ou reparar a unidade.
¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre unbastidor, o posteriormente durante sumantenimiento, se debeponermuchocuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad,proceda según las siguientes instrucciones:
• El Juniper Networks switch debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a laestructura del edificio.
• Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la únicaunidad en el mismo.
• Cuandoesteequiposevayaa instalarenunbastidorparcialmenteocupado,comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocandoel equipomás pesado en la parte inferior.
• Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antesdemontaroprocederalmantenimientodel equipo instaladoenelbastidor.
Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utförunderhållsarbete på denna enhet på en ställningmåste du vidta särskildaförsiktighetsåtgärder föratt försäkradigomattsystemetstår stadigt. Följanderiktlinjer ges för att trygga din säkerhet:
• Juniper Networks switchmåste installeras i en ställning som är förankradi byggnadens struktur.
• Omdenna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeraslängst ned på ställningen.
• Omdenna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningenfyllasnedifrånochupp,meddetyngstaenheterna längstnedpåställningen.
• Omställningenär förseddmedstabiliseringsdonskalldessamonteras fastinnan enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.270
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
• Mounting an EX2200 Switch
• Mounting an EX3200 Switch
• Mounting an EX3300 Switch
• Mounting an EX4200 Switch
• Mounting an EX4300 Switch
• Mounting an EX4500 Switch
• Mounting an EX4550 Switch
• Mounting an EX4600 Switch in a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting an EX6210 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting an EX8208 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting an EX8216 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting an EX9200Switch on aRack or Cabinet Using aMechanical Lift on page 129
• Mounting an EX9204 Switch on a Rack or Cabinet Without Using a Mechanical Lift
• Mounting an EX9208 Switch on a Rack or CabinetWithout Using aMechanical Lift on
page 132
• Mounting an OCX1100 Switch
• Mounting a QFX3100 Director Device on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting a QFX3100 Director Device on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device on a Rack or Cabinet Using a Mechanical
Lift
• Mounting a QFX3600 or QFX3600-I Device on Four Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting a QFX3600 or QFX3600-I Device on Two Posts in a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting a QFX3500 Device in a Rack or Cabinet
• Mounting a QFX5100 Device in a Rack or Cabinet
Grounded EquipmentWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Thedevice is intended tobegrounded.Duringnormaluse, ensurethat you have connected earth ground to the chassis.
271Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat dehost-computer tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.
Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettumaadoitettavaksi. Varmista, ettäisäntälaite on yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.
Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareilhôte est relié à la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß dasHost-Gerät während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.
AvvertenzaQuestaapparecchiaturadeveesserecollegataamassa.Accertarsiche il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normaleutilizzo.
AdvarselDette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordetved normalt bruk.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o hostse encontra ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.
¡Atención!Esteequipodebeconectarsea tierra.Asegurarsedequeel equipoprincipal esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.
Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten ärjordad vid normal användning.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines andWarnings
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Whileperforming themaintenanceactivities fordevices, observe the followingguidelines
and warnings:
• Battery HandlingWarning on page 273
• Jewelry Removal Warning on page 274
• Lightning Activity Warning on page 275
• Operating TemperatureWarning on page 275
• Product Disposal Warning on page 277
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.272
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Battery HandlingWarning
WARNING: Replacing a battery incorrectly might result in an explosion.Replace a battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended bythemanufacturer. Disposeof usedbatteries according to themanufacturer'sinstructions.
Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangenwordt. Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type datdoor de fabrikant aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijendienenovereenkomstigfabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.
Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytävaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka onvalmistajansuosittelema.Hävitäkäytetytakutvalmistajanohjeidenmukaan.
Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement.Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent,recommandée par le fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément auxinstructions du fabricant.
Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr.Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vomHerstellerempfohlenen Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach denAnweisungen des Herstellers.
Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte.Skift kunmed sammeeller tilsvarende type somer anbefalt av produsenten.Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.
Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installatacorrettamente.Sostituiresoloconunadi tipougualeoequivalente, consigliatadalproduttore. Eliminare lebatterieusatesecondo le istruzionidelproduttore.
AvisoExiste perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente.Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalenterecomendado pelo fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme asinstruções do fabricante.
¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza demaneraincorrecta. Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o elequivalente recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadassegún las instrucciones del fabricante.
Varning!Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batterietmedsamma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande.Följ tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.
273Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
Jewelry RemovalWarning
WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines,remove jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heatupwhen connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or canbe welded to the terminals.
Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrischeleidingen is verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges)verwijderen. Metalen voorwerpen worden warmwanneer zemet stroom enaarde zijn verbonden, en kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of hetmetalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen lassen.
Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteidenparissa, otapois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellotmukaan lukien).Metalliesineet kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maankanssa, janevoivataiheuttaavakaviapalovammoja tai hitsatametalliesineetkiinni liitäntänapoihin.
AttentionAvantd'accéderàcetéquipementconnectéaux lignesélectriques,ôter toutbijou(anneaux,colliersetmontrescompris). Lorsqu'ilssontbranchésà l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce quipeutprovoquerdesblessuresgravesousouder l'objetmétalliqueauxbornes.
Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind,jeglichen Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen.Metallgegenstände erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erdeangeschlossen werden, und können schwere Verbrennungen verursachenoder an die Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt werden.
Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee dialimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialettied orologi). Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra puntidi alimentazione emassa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallopuò saldarsi ai terminali.
Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før duskal arbeidepåutstyr somer koblet til kraftledninger.Metallgjenstander somer koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorligebrannskader eller smelte fast til polene.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas decorrente, retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios erelógios). Os objectosmetálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente eem contacto com a ligação à terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ouficarem soldados aos terminais.
¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas dealimentación, quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.274
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
objetosdemetal secalientancuandoseconectana laalimentaciónyatierra,lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetosmetálicosqueden soldados a los bornes.
Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur)innanduarbetarpåutrustningsomärkopplad till kraftledningar.Metallobjekthettas upp när de kopplas ihopmed ström och jord och kan förorsakaallvarliga brännskador; metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsasmedkontakterna.
Lightning ActivityWarning
WARNING: Donotworkon thesystemorconnectordisconnectcablesduringperiods of lightning activity.
Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u nietaan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.
Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrotakaapeleita ukkosilmalla.
AttentionNe pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher lescâbles pendant un orage.
Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel anbzw. trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.
AvvertenzaNon lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavidurante un temporale con fulmini.
AdvarselUtfør aldri arbeidpåsystemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemetnår det tordner eller lyner.
AvisoNão trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodosdemau tempo (trovoada).
¡Atención!No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante eltranscurso de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.
Varning!Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta ellerkoppla loss kablar.
Operating TemperatureWarning
WARNING: To prevent the device from overheating, do not operate it in anarea that exceeds themaximum recommended ambient temperature of104° F (40° C) for EX6200 switches, EX8208 switches, EX8216 switches,
275Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
QFXSeriesdevices,OCX1100switches,andXRE200ExternalRoutingEnginesand 113°F(45°C) forEX2200,EX3300,EX3200,EX4200,EX4300,EX4500,and EX4550 switches. To prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 6 in.(15.2 cm) of clearance around the ventilation openings.
WaarschuwingOm te voorkomen dat welke switch van de Juniper Networksrouter dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaatswaar demaximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40° Cwordtoverschreden. Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroomwordt beperkt, dient erminstens 15,2 cm speling rond de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.
Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks switch-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä eisaa käyttää tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellunympäristölämpötilan 40° C. Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojenympärille on jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.
Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme JuniperNetworks switch, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zoneoù la température ambianteest supérieure à 40° C. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez unespace d'aumoins 15,2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations.
WarnungUmeinenRouterder switchvorÜberhitzungzuschützen,darfdiesernicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperaturdas empfohlene Maximum von 40° C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschlußzu verhindern, achten Sie darauf, daßmindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum umdie Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei bleibt.
Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei switch, non adoperateli in unlocale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40° C. Per evitareche lacircolazionedell'aria sia impedita, lasciateunospaziodialmeno 15.2cmdi fronte alle aperture delle ventole.
AdvarselUnngåoveropphetingaveventuelle rutere i JuniperNetworksswitchDisse skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimaleomgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40° C (104° F). Sørg for at klaringenrundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsattluftsirkulasjon.
Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networksswitch, não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperaturamáxima recomendada de 40° C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar,deixe pelomenos um espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.
¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networksswitch se recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere latemperatura ambientemáxima recomendada de 40° C. Para impedir larestricciónde laentradadeaire, dejeunespaciomínimode 15,2 cmalrededorde las aperturas para ventilación.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.276
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks switch överhettas genomatt inteanvända den i ett område där denmaximalt rekommenderadeomgivningstemperaturenpå40°Cöverskrids. Förhindraatt luftcirkulationeninskränksgenomattse till attdet finns fritt utrymmepåminst 15,2cmomkringventilationsöppningarna.
Product DisposalWarning
WARNING: Disposal of this devicemust be handled according to all nationallaws and regulations.
Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten envoorschriften te worden afgedankt.
VaroitusTämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkiavaltakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.
Attention Lamise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuéeconformément à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.
Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriftenentsprechend entsorgt werden.
Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguitaosservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia
AdvarselEndeligdisponeringavdetteproduktetmåskje ihenholdtil nasjonalelover og forskrifter.
Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordocom os regulamentos e a legislação nacional.
¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas lasleyes y regulaciones nacionales
Varning!Slutlig kasseringavdennaproduktbör skötas i enlighetmed landetsalla lagar och föreskrifter.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for Switches on page 257
• Laser and LED Safety Guidelines andWarnings for the QFX Series
• Installation InstructionsWarning on page 263
277Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 19: Installation and Maintenance Safety Information
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.278
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 20
Power and Electrical Safety Information
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 280
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
• AC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 284
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 287
• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 289
• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 290
• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 292
• Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning on page 293
• TN PowerWarning on page 294
• Action to Take After an Electrical Accident on page 294
General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Certain ports on the device are designed for use as intrabuilding(within-the-building) interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described inGR-1089-CORE) and require isolation from the exposedoutside plant (OSP)cabling. To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightningsurges and commercial power disturbances, the intrabuilding portsmust notbemetallically connected to interfaces that connect to theOSP or its wiring.The intrabuilding ports on the device are suitable for connection tointrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The addition of primaryprotectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these interfacesmetallically to OSPwiring.
279Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
CAUTION: Before removing or installing components of a device, attach anelectrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to an ESD point and place theother endof thestraparoundyourbarewrist. Failure touseanESDgroundingstrap could result in damage to the switch.
• Install the device in compliance with the following local, national, and international
electrical codes:
• United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States
National Electrical Code.
• Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1
through Part 7.
• Evaluated to the TN power system.
• Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.
• Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that
if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.
• Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish before
grounding connections are made.
• Donotworkalone if potentially hazardousconditionsexist anywhere in yourworkspace.
• Never assume thatpower is disconnected fromacircuit. Always check thecircuit before
starting to work.
• Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such asmoist floors, ungrounded
power extension cords, andmissing safety grounds.
• Operate the device within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions.
• To ensure that the device and peripheral equipment function safely and correctly, use
the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment, andmake
certain they are in good condition.
You can remove and replace many device components without powering off or
disconnectingpower to thedevice, asdetailedelsewhere in thehardwaredocumentation
for this device. Never install an equipment that it appears to be damaged.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
Prevention of Electrostatic Discharge Damage
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.280
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Device components that are shipped in antistatic bags are sensitive to damage from
static electricity. Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You
can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic
or foam packing material or if youmove components across plastic or carpets. Observe
the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)
damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:
• AlwaysuseanESDgroundingstrapwhenyouarehandlingcomponents thatare subject
to ESD damage, andmake sure that it is in direct contact with your skin.
If a grounding strap is not available, hold the component in its antistatic bag (see
Figure 79 on page 281) in one hand and touch the exposed, bare metal of the device
with the other hand immediately before inserting the component into the device.
WARNING: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESDgrounding strap. Themeasurementmust be in the range 1 through10Mohms.
• When handling any component that is subject to ESD damage and that is removed
from thedevice,make sure the equipment endof your ESDgrounding strap is attached
to the ESD point on the chassis.
If nogrounding strap is available, touch theexposed, baremetal of thedevice toground
yourself before handling the component.
• Avoidcontactbetween thecomponent that is subject toESDdamageandyourclothing.
ESD voltages emitted from clothing can damage components.
• When removing or installing a component that is subject to ESDdamage, always place
it component-side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an
antistatic bag (see Figure 79 on page 281). If you are returning a component, place it in
an antistatic bag before packing it.
Figure 79: Placing a Component into an Antistatic Bag
6xGE
SFP
0
1
2
3
4
5
CAUTIONELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVEDEVICES
DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLEEXCEPT AT A
STATIC-FREE WORKSTATION
281Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
CAUTION: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 cables such as Category 5e and Category 6can get electrostatically charged. To dissipate this charge, always groundthe cables to a suitable and safe earth groundbefore connecting them to thesystem.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• See EX2200 Switches Hardware Overview for the ESD point location.
• See Rear Panel of an EX3200 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See Rear Panel of an EX3300 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See Rear Panel of an EX4200 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See EX4300 Switches Hardware Overview for the ESD point location.
• See Front Panel of an EX4500 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See EX4550 Switches Hardware Overview for the ESD point location.
• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX6210 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8208 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See Chassis Physical Specifications of an EX8216 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See EX9204 Switch Hardware Overview for the ESD point location.
• See EX9208 Switch Hardware Overview on page 3 for the ESD point location.
• See EX9214 Switch Hardware Overview for the ESD point location.
• SeeOCX1100 Switches Hardware Overview for the ESD point location.
• SeeQFX3008-I Interconnect Device Overview for the ESD point location.
• See Front Panel of a QFX3500 Device for the ESD point location.
• See Front Panel of a QFX3600 Device for the ESD point location.
• See Physical Description of a Redundant Power System
• See Port Panel of an EX4600 Switch for the ESD point location.
• See Port Panel of a QFX5100-48S Device for the ESD point location.
• See Port Panel of a QFX5100-24Q Device for the ESD point location.
• See Port Panel of a QFX5100-96S Device for the ESD point location.
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.282
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CAUTION: For devices with AC power supplies, an external surge protectivedevice (SPD)must be used at the AC power source.
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered devices:
• Note the following warnings printed on the device:
“CAUTION: THIS UNIT HASMORE THANONE POWER SUPPLY CORD. DISCONNECT
ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK.”
“ATTENTION: CET APPAREIL COMPORTE PLUS D'UN CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.AFIN DE PRÉVENIR LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, DÉBRANCHER TOUT CORDON
D'ALIMENTATION AVANT DE FAIRE LE DÉPANNAGE.”
• AC-powereddevicesare shippedwitha three-wireelectrical cordwithagrounding-type
plug that fits only a grounding-typepower outlet. Donot circumvent this safety feature.
Equipment grounding must comply with local and national electrical codes.
• Youmustprovideanexternal certifiedcircuit breaker ratedminimum20A in thebuilding
installation.
• The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device for the AC-powered device.
The socket outlet must be near the AC-powered device and be easily accessible.
• For devices that havemore than one power supply connection, youmust ensure that
all power connections are fully disconnected so that power to the device is completely
removed to prevent electric shock. To disconnect power, unplug all power cords (one
for each power supply).
Power CableWarning (Japanese)
WARNING: The attached power cable is only for this product. Do not use the cable for another product.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning on page 293
• Connecting AC Power to an EX2200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX3200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX3300 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4200 Switch
283Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4300 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4500 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4550 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX4600 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX6200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX8200 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 169
• Connecting AC Power to an EX9214 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine
• Connecting AC Power to an OCX1100 Switch
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3100 Director Device
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3008-I Interconnect Device with Single-PhaseWiring
Trays
• ConnectingACPower toaQFX3008-I InterconnectDevicewithThree-PhaseDeltaWiring
Trays
• Connecting ACPower to aQFX3008-I Interconnect Devicewith Three-PhaseWyeWiring
Trays
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX3500, QFX3600, or QFX3600-I Device
• Connecting AC Power to a QFX5100 Device
AC Power DisconnectionWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Before working on the switch or near power supplies, unplug allthe power cords from an AC switch.
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingenwerkt, dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit hetstopcontact te halen.
Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto, ennen kuin teet mitäänasennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden läheisyydessä.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.284
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
AttentionAvantde travailler surunchâssisouàproximitéd'unealimentationélectrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courantalternatif.
Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgerätenarbeiten, ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw.
AvvertenzaPrimadi lavorare suun telaioo intornoadalimentatori, scollegareil cavo di alimentazione sulle unità CA.
Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærhetenav strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut påvekselstrømsenheter.
AvisoAntesdetrabalharnumchassis,ouantesdetrabalharpertodeunidadesde fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidadesde corrente alternada.
¡Atención!Antes demanipular el chasis de un equipoo trabajar cerca deunafuentedealimentación, desenchufar el cabledealimentaciónen losequiposde corriente alterna (CA).
Varning! Innanduarbetarmedett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheterskall du för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series.
285Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
• A DC-powered device is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power
requirements of a maximally configured device.
NOTE: Tosupplysufficientpower, terminate theDC inputwiringona facilityDC source that is capable of supplying:
• Minimum of 7.5 A at –48 VDC for EX2200 and EX3300 switches
• Minimum of 8 A at –48 VDC for EX3200 and EX4200 switches
• Minimumof20Aat–48VDCforEX4300,EX4500,andEX4550switches
• Minimum of 50 A at –48 VDC for EX6210 switches
• Minimum of 60 A at –48 VDC for EX8208 switches
• Minimum of 100 A at –48 VDC for EX8216 switches
• Minimumof7Aat–48VDCforQFX3500,EX4600,andQFX5100devices
• Minimum of 8 A at –48 VDC for QFX3600 devices
Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring. Be sure to
connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground. A closed loop ring is
recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.
• Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC.
• A DC-powered device that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for
installation in a restricted access location. In the United States, a restricted access
area isone inaccordancewithArticles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18of theNational Electrical
Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuitbreaker. This breaker must protect against excess currents, short circuits,and earth grounding faults in accordance with NEC ANSI/NFPA 70.
• Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions,
connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage
the equipment.
• For personal safety, connect the green and yellowwire to safety (earth) ground at both
the device and the supply side of the DC wiring.
• Themarked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered device is the nominal voltage
associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to be associated
with float voltages for the charging function.
• Because the device is a positive ground system, youmust connect the positive lead to
the terminal labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal labeled –48 VDC, and the
earth ground to the device grounding points.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.286
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 287
• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 289
• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 290
• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 292
• Connecting DC Power to an EX2200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX3200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4300 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4500 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4550 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX4600 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX6200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX8200 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9204 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9208 Switch on page 173
• Connecting DC Power to an EX9214 Switch
• Connecting DC Power to an XRE200 External Routing Engine
• Connecting DC Power to a QFX3500, QFX3600, or QFX3600-I Device
• Connecting DC Power to a QFX5100 Device
DC Power DisconnectionWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Before performing any of the DC power procedures, ensure thatpower is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locatethe circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch thecircuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the device handle of the circuitbreaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert,dientu tecontrolerenofdestroomnaarhetgelijkstroomcircuit uitgeschakeldis. Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroomUIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het
287Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draaitde stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van destroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavientoimenpiteiden suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTUtäysin,paikannatasavirrastahuolehtivassakojetaulussasijaitsevasuojakytkin,käännä suojakytkin KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsiniin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.
Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous,vérifier que le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en êtresûr, localiser ledisjoncteur situésur lepanneaudeserviceducircuit encourantcontinu, placer le disjoncteur enposition fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un rubanadhésif, bloquer la poignée du disjoncteur en position OFF.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daßdie Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daßsämtlicher Strom abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel denUnterbrecher für die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie denUnterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechersmit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.
AvvertenzaPrimadi svolgereunaqualsiasidelleprocedureseguenti, verificareche il circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazionesia scollegata (OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadrostrumenti che alimenta il circuito CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFFe fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.
Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen erfrakoblet likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres vedå lokalisere strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen,slå strømbryterenAVog teipebryterhåndtaketpåstrømbryteren iAV-stilling.
AvisoAntes de executar umdos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se quedesligou a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua.Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor nopainel que serve o circuito de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF(Desligado), segurandonessaposiçãoamanivelado interruptor dodisjuntorcom fita isoladora.
¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que laalimentacióndelcircuitodecorrientecontinua(CC)estécortada(OFF).Paraasegurarse de que toda la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar elinterruptor automático en el panel que alimenta al circuito de corrientecontinua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la posicióndeApagado (OFF),y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en posición deApagado (OFF).
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.288
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrolleraatt strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att allströmförsörjning är BRUTEN genomatt slå AV det överspänningsskydd somskyddar likströmskretsen och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplarei FRÅN-läget.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 289
• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 290
• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 292
DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
An insulatedgroundingconductor that is identical in size to thegroundedandungrounded
branchcircuit supply conductorsbut is identifiablebygreenandyellowstripes is installed
as part of the branch circuit that supplies the device. The grounding conductor is a
separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set.
WARNING: When you install the device, the ground connectionmust alwaysbemade first and disconnected last.
WaarschuwingBij de installatie vanhet toestelmoetdeaardverbindingaltijdhet eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa onmaahan yhdistäminen aina tehtäväensiksi ja maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujoursêtre connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschlußmuß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuersthergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo ilcollegamento amassa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
AdvarselNår enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først ogfrakobles sist.
289Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira aser ligada, e a última a ser desligada.
¡Atención!Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarlala última.
Varning!Vid installationavenhetenmåste jordledningenalltid anslutas förstoch kopplas bort sist.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 287
• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 290
• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 292
DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. Whenconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to+RTN, then –48 V to –48 V.When disconnecting power, the proper wiringsequence is –48 V to –48 V, +RTN to +RTN, then ground to ground. Notethat the ground wire must always be connected first and disconnected last.
WaarschuwingDe juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde,+RTN naar +RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgordelosgemaakt is en –48 naar –48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.
VaroitusOikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys onmaajohtomaajohtoon,+RTN varten +RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestyson –48 V varten – 48 V, +RTN varten +RTN, maajohtomaajohtoon.
Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant lescrochets appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordreapproprié de câblage est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis –48 V à–48 V. En débranchant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est –48 Và–48V, +RTNà+RTN, a alors rectifié pour rectifier. Notez que le fil demassedevrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour la dernière fois. Notezque le fil demasse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour ladernière fois.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.290
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
WarnungDieStromzufuhr ist nurmit geeignetenRingösenandasDCNetzteilanzuschliessen. Die richtige Anschlusssequenz ist: Erdanschluss zuErdanschluss, +RTN zu +RTN und dann -48V zu -48V. Die richtige Sequenzzum Abtrennen der Stromversorgung ist -48V zu -48V, +RTN zu +RTN unddannErdanschlusszuErdanschluss.Es ist zubeachtendassderErdanschlussimmer zuerst angeschlossen und als letztes abgetrennt wird.
AvvertenzaMostra lamorsettieradellalimentatoreCC.Cablare l'alimentatoreCC usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. Lacorretta sequenza di cablaggio è damassa amassa, da positivo a positivo(da linea ad L) e da negativo a negativo (da neutro aN). Tenere presente cheil filodimassadevesemprevenire collegatoperprimoescollegatoperultimo.
Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN,–48V til – 48V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48V til – 48V, +RTNtil +RTN, jord til jord.
Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminalesapropiados en el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuenciaapropiada del cableado semuele paramoler, +RTNa+RTN, entonces –48Va –48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado es–48 V a –48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entoncesmolió paramoler. Observe que elalambrede tierra sedebeconectar siempreprimeroydesconectarporúltimo.Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero ydesconectar por último.
¡Atención!Wire a fonte de alimentaçãodeDCUsandoos talões apropriadosna extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriadada fiação émoída paramoer, +RTN a +RTN, então –48 V a –48 V. Aodesconectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é –48 V a –48 V,+RTN a +RTN, moeu então paramoer. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempreser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último. Anote que o fio àterra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último.
Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till–48V. Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48V till –48V, +RTN till +RTN,jord till jord.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 287
• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 289
• DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning on page 292
291Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
DC PowerWiring TerminationsWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
switches and the XRE200 External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiringterminations, such as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. Theseterminationsmustbe theappropriate size for thewires andmust clampboththe insulation and conductor.
WaarschuwingWanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading tegebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals hetgesloten-lus typeofhetgrijperschop typewaarbij deaansluitpuntenomhoogwijzen. Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juistemaat voor de draden te hebbenen dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen.
Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdinon tarpeen, käytähyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää,esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäinkäännetyt kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiinsopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.
AttentionQuand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douillesterminales homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plageouverte avec cosses rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de lataille qui convient aux fils et doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante etsur le conducteur.
WarnungWenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelasseneVerdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis odergabelförmig, mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. DieseAbschlüsse solltendie angemesseneGröße für dieDrähtehabenundsowohldie Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen.
AvvertenzaQuando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, comequelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettoridevono avere lamisura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolanteche il conduttore.
AdvarselHvis det er nødvendigmed flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjenteledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetypemedoppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forholdtil ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.
AvisoQuando forem requeridasmontagens de instalação eléctrica de cabotorcido,use terminaçõesdecaboaprovadas, tais como, terminaçõesdecaboem circuito fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima.Estas terminações de cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.292
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
respectivos cabos, e deverão prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fiocondutor.
¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cableshomologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con laslengüetas de conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser deltamañoapropiadopara loscablesqueseutilicen, y tendránquesujetar tantoel aislante como el conductor.
Varning!När flertrådiga ledningar krävsmåste godkända ledningskontakteranvändas, t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typmed uppåtvänd tapp.Storlekenpådessakontaktermåstevaraavpassad till ledningarnaochmåstekunna hålla både isoleringen och ledaren fastklämda.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
• DC Power DisconnectionWarning on page 287
• DC Power Grounding Requirements andWarning on page 289
• DC PowerWiring SequenceWarning on page 290
Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: For a device that hasmore than one power supply connection,youmust ensure that all power connections are fully disconnected so thatpower to the device is completely removed.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
293Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
TN PowerWarning
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
WARNING: The device is designed to work with a TN power system.
WaarschuwingHet apparaat is ontworpen om te functionerenmet TNenergiesystemen.
Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmienyhteydessä.
Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmesd'alimentation TN.
WarnungDasGerät ist fürdieVerwendungmitTN-Stromsystemenausgelegt.
Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi dialimentazione TN.
AdvarselUtstyret er utfomet til brukmed TN-strømsystemer.
AvisoO dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.
¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas dealimentación tipo TN.
Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammansmedelkraftssystem av TN-typ.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• Grounded EquipmentWarning on page 271
• Multiple Power Supplies DisconnectionWarning on page 293
Action to Take After an Electrical Accident
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic also applies to hardware devices in the QFX Series and to OCX1100 switches.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.294
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:
1. Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further
injury.
2. Disconnect power from the device.
3. If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition
of the victim, then call for help.
RelatedDocumentation
General Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 249•
• General Electrical Safety Guidelines andWarnings on page 279
• AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 282
• DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 285
295Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 20: Power and Electrical Safety Information
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.296
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
PART 9
Compliance Information
• Compliance Information on page 299
297Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.298
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
CHAPTER 21
Compliance Information
• Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 299
• Battery Compliance Statement for Environmental Requirements for EX Series
Switches on page 300
• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 300
• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 304
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
These hardware devices comply with the following standards:
• Safety
• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment
• UL 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment
• EN 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment
• IEC 60950-1 Information Technology Equipment
• EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment classification and
requirements
• EMC
• FCC 47CFR Part 15 Class A (USA)
• EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)
• ICES-003 Class A
• VCCI Class A (Japan)
• AS/NZS CISPR 22 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)
• CISPR 22 Class A
• EN 55024
299Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
• EN 300386
• EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics
• EN 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
• EN 61000-4-2 ESD
• EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity
• EN 61000-4-4 EFT
• EN 61000-4-5 Surge
• EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity
• EN 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags
RelatedDocumentation
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 300•
• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 304
BatteryComplianceStatement forEnvironmentalRequirements forEXSeriesSwitches
EX6200 and EX8200 Ethernet switches contain lithium batteries.
Batteries used in these switches are not based on substances containing mercury, lead,
or cadmium. The batteries used in these switches complywith EUDirectives 91/157/EEC,
93/86/EEC, and 98/101/EEC. The product documentation includes instructional
information on the proper method of reclamation and recycling.
RelatedDocumentation
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 299•
• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 300
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
This topic describes the EMC requirements for these hardware devices for:
• Canada on page 301
• European Community on page 301
• Israel on page 301
• Japan on page 302
• Korea on page 302
• United States on page 302
• FCC Part 15 Statement on page 302
• Nonregulatory Environmental Standards on page 303
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.300
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and
safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to
the users’ satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to connect the
equipment to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the
inside wiring associated with a single line individual service can be extended bymeans
of a certified connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with
the above conditions might not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should bemade by an authorized Canadianmaintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, might give the telecommunications company
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
CAUTION: Users should not attempt tomake electrical ground connectionsby themselves, but should contact the appropriate inspection authority oran electrician, as appropriate.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution might be particularly important in rural areas.
European Community
This is a Class A device. In a domestic environment this device might cause radio
interference, in which case the user needs to take adequate measures.
Israel
Translation from Hebrew–Warning: This product is Class A. In residential environments,
theproductmaycause radio interference, and in suchasituation, theusermaybe required
to take adequate measures.
301Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 21: Compliance Information
Japan
The preceding translates as follows:
This is a Class A device. In a domestic environment this device might cause radio
interference, in which case the user needs to take adequate measures.
VCCI-A
Korea
Korean Class A Warning g040
913
The preceding translates as follows:
This equipment is Industrial (Class A) electromagnetic wave suitability equipment and
seller or user should takenoticeof it, and this equipment is tobeused in theplacesexcept
for home
United States
The device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequencyenergyand, if not installedandused inaccordancewith the instructionmanual,
might cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users need to
correct the interference at their own expense.
FCC Part 15 Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, might cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.302
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help.
Nonregulatory Environmental Standards
NEBS compliance—These EX Series switches are Network Equipment Building System(NEBS) compliant:
• EX2200-24T and EX2200-48T
• EX3200-24T, EX3200-48T
• EX3300-24T, EX3300-48T
• EX4200-24T, EX4200-24F, EX4200-24F-S, EX4200-48T and EX4200-48T-S
• EX4300-24T, EX4300-24T-S, EX4300-24P, EX4300-24P-S, EX4300-32F,
EX4300-32F-S, EX4300-48T, EX4300-48T-AFI, EX4300-48T-S, EX4300-48P, and
EX4300-48P-S
• All EX4500 switches with AC power supplies
• EX4550-32T-AFO, EX4550-32T-AFI, EX4550-32F-AFO, EX4550-32F-AFI, and
EX4550-32F-S
• EX4600-40F and EX4600-40F-S
• All EX6200 switches
NOTE: For the EX6200-48P line cards, the intra-building ports must useshielded intra-building cabling or wiring that is grounded at both ends.
• All EX8200 switches
Those switch switches meet the following NEBS compliance standards:
• SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 4 Compliance)
• GR-1089-CORE:EMCandElectricalSafety forNetworkTelecommunicationsEquipment
• GR-63-CORE: NEBS, Physical Protection
• The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network
(CBN).
• The equipment is suitable for installation in locations where the National Electrical
Code (NEC) applies.
303Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.
Chapter 21: Compliance Information
• The battery return connection is to be treated as an Isolated DC return (DC-I), as
defined in GR-1089-CORE.
RelatedDocumentation
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 299•
• Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches on page 304
Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise for EX Series Switches
This topic applies to hardware devices in the EX Series product family, which includes
EX Series switches, the EX Series Redundant Power System (RPS), and the XRE200
External Routing Engine.
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel
beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779
Translation:
The emitted sound pressure is below 70 dB(A) per EN ISO 7779.
RelatedDocumentation
Agency Approvals for EX Series Switches on page 299•
• Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements for EX Series Switches on page 300
Copyright © 2015, Juniper Networks, Inc.304
Complete Hardware Guide for EX9208 Ethernet Switches